Update Asturian translation

126 files changed, 25857 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast.po b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..44c9a835
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast.po
@@ -0,0 +1,4505 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE
+# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package.
+#
+# Translators:
+# enolp <enolp@softastur.org>, 2015,2020
+# Ḷḷumex03, 2014
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-09-08 15:58+0300\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-04-02 02:10+0000\n"
+"Last-Translator: enolp <enolp@softastur.org>\n"
+"Language-Team: Asturian (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/"
+"language/ast/)\n"
+"Language: ast\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:31
+msgid "License and Release Notes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
+"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision="
+"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref="
+"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align="
+"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
+"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision="
+"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref="
+"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align="
+"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:46
+msgid "License Agreement"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions "
+"carefully."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must "
+"be accepted before you can continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on "
+"<emphasis>Next</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your "
+"interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your "
+"computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:76
+msgid "Release Notes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by "
+"clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:3
+msgid "Supplemental Installation Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-13  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy.
+#. 2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media."
+"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision="
+"\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media."
+"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision="
+"\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source.  "
+"The source selection determines which packages will be available during the "
+"subsequent steps."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:28
+msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:32
+msgid "Choosing and activating the network, if not already up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a "
+"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by "
+"Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Tainted</"
+"emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, "
+"you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit "
+"packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by "
+"selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only "
+"contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be "
+"able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, "
+"the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:9
+msgid "User Management"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)
+#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography.
+#. 2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6.
+#. 2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management).
+#.   Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'.
+#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style.
+#. 2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png.
+#. 2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/addUser.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata fileref=\"live-user1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata fileref=\"live-user1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:40
+msgid "Set Administrator (root)  Password:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a <literal>superuser</"
+"literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the <emphasis>root </"
+"emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
+"underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from red-to-"
+"yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green shield "
+"shows you are using a strong password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters "
+"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:63
+msgid "Enter a user"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the "
+"<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office "
+"applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a "
+"computer for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:73
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Icon</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:75
+msgid "Click on this button if you want to change the user's icon"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:80
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Real Name</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:82
+msgid "Insert the user's real name into this text box"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:86
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Name</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:88
+msgid ""
+"Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real "
+"name. <emphasis role=\"bold\">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><caution><simpara>
+#: en/addUser.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for "
+"your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be "
+"written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as "
+"Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:102 en/setupBootloader.xml:182
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:104
+msgid "Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user "
+"password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is "
+"both read and write protected (umask=0027)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</"
+"emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</"
+"emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:121
+msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:128
+msgid "User Management (advanced)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings "
+"for the user you are adding."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:136
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the "
+"shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are "
+"<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you "
+"added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, "
+"then leave it blank."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID.  Again, if "
+"unsure, leave it blank."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:10
+msgid "Choose the mount points"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 28 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
+#.  removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 
+#.  barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+#.        with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) 
+#.  Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes 
+#.  Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+#.        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it
+#.  And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) 
+#.  2012-04-19  Language proofreading done 
+#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.
+#. 2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
+"you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points "
+"yourself."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For "
+"example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and <filename>5</"
+"filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed by "
+"the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the "
+"partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"If you have several partitions, you can choose various different "
+"<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as "
+"<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and <filename>/var</"
+"filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for instance <filename>/"
+"video</filename> for a partition where you want to store your films, or "
+"perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:73
+msgid ""
+"For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the "
+"mount point field blank."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename> "
+"(root) partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to "
+"go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where "
+"you can click on a partition to see its type and size."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <emphasis>Next</"
+"emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition "
+"suggested by DrakX, or more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:5
+msgid "Clock Settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-"
+"bestTime.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-"
+"bestTime.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local "
+"time or UTC time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time "
+"synchronization and specify an NTP server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:10
+msgid "Boot Mageia as Live system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:14
+msgid "Booting the medium"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug "
+"the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need "
+"to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try "
+"accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer "
+"will boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try "
+"pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or <keycap>Esc</"
+"keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>, <keycap>F8</keycap>, "
+"<keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the boot device menu. These "
+"(fairly common) keys are just a selection of possible options though."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media "
+"will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or "
+"UEFI type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:39
+msgid "In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\" align=\"center\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\" align=\"center\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:46
+msgid "First screen while booting in BIOS mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:50 en/bootLive.xml:104 en/installer.xml:108
+#: en/installer.xml:156
+msgid "Menu"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:52 en/bootLive.xml:106
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot Mageia</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB "
+"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:56
+msgid "Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:60 en/bootLive.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to boot)</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:62
+msgid "Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:68 en/bootLive.xml:112 en/installer.xml:111
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install Mageia</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:69 en/bootLive.xml:113
+msgid "This option will install Mageia to a hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:74
+msgid "Install Mageia using non-free video drivers"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:79 en/installer.xml:127
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Memory Test</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:80 en/installer.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write operations. "
+"Reboot to end the test."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:84 en/bootLive.xml:116
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\"> F2 Language</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:85 en/bootLive.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language "
+"during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then "
+"press <keycap>Enter</keycap>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:93
+msgid "In UEFI mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:100
+msgid "First screen while booting in UEFI mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB "
+"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS).  Once the "
+"boot is done, you can proceed to the installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options "
+"duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will "
+"be suffixed with \"USB\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:16
+msgid "Desktop Selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:23
+msgid "Some choices made here will open other screens with related options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the "
+"installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing "
+"the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop "
+"environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or, "
+"actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software "
+"choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is "
+"lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer "
+"packages installed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:3
+msgid "Package Group Selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC
+#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on "
+"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however "
+"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which "
+"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Workstation</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Server</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical Environment</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use "
+"this option to manually add or remove packages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"See <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"/> for instructions on how to do a "
+"minimal install (without or with X &amp; IceWM)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:3
+msgid "Choose Individual Packages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.
+#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png"
+"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png"
+"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <emphasis>floppy</"
+"emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages "
+"(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the "
+"same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install "
+"and choosing to load it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:3
+msgid "Configure your Services"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#.  2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment.
+#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The "
+"settings DrakX chose are usually good."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info "
+"box below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:37
+msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:3
+msgid "Configure your Timezone"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment.
+#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
+"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" "
+"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
+"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" "
+"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the "
+"same timezone."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time "
+"or to GMT, also known as UTC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
+"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:27
+msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
+"correctly identify your video device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
+"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 en/configureX_monitor.xml:78
+msgid "Vendor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:48
+msgid "then the make of your card"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:52
+msgid "and the model of card"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
+"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
+"<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and "
+"open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver "
+"for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides "
+"basic capabilities."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><caution><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
+"to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
+"may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in "
+"some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The "
+"<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to "
+"access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after "
+"your first reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:23
+msgid "Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) "
+"you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user "
+"interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply "
+"<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other "
+"graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings "
+"need to be correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are "
+"incorrect, or if none are shown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:46
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphics Card</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable list. "
+"See <xref linkend=\"configureX_card_list\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:54
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the "
+"<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose "
+"<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and "
+"vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref linkend="
+"\"configureX_monitor\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:65
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:68
+msgid "The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:73
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is "
+"there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your "
+"settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings "
+"will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration "
+"screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is "
+"satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your "
+"settings are on the safe side."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:87
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:90
+msgid "Here you can choose to enable or disable various options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are "
+"outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT "
+"displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally "
+"enter standby mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26
+msgid "Choosing your Monitor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually "
+"correctly identify yours."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics "
+"could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something "
+"without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:50
+msgid "Custom"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh "
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
+"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
+"displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor "
+"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you "
+"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:68
+msgid "Plug'n Play"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor "
+"type from the monitor database."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which "
+"one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:90
+msgid "Manufacturer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:94
+msgid "Monitor model"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:100
+msgid "Generic"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such "
+"as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops.  "
+"This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA "
+"card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. "
+"Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:24
+msgid "Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, "
+"change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details "
+"before you start."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage "
+"device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>, "
+"<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, "
+"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it. "
+"<emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label "
+"(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click "
+"<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you "
+"are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename> partition. "
+"The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename> partition must NOT "
+"be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System "
+"Partition) is present and correctly mounted on <filename>/boot/EFI</"
+"filename>. See Figure 1 below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot "
+"partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:103
+msgid "EFI System Partition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:105 en/diskdrake.xml:119
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:117
+msgid "BIOS boot partition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:120 en/doPartitionDisks.xml:206
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:1
+msgid "en"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><title>
+#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:4
+msgid "Partitioning"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:31
+msgid "Suggested Partitioning"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the "
+"DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to "
+"the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><title>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:53
+msgid "Main Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have "
+"been found and may be used for the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
+"your new Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
+"offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia "
+"installation but see the warning below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:82
+msgid ""
+"With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in "
+"light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their "
+"intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by "
+"clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions.  See the following "
+"screenshot:<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is "
+"a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important "
+"files before proceeding."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"The partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down "
+"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, "
+"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been "
+"moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:112
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:115
+msgid "This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you "
+"intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data "
+"on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:127
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:130
+msgid ""
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
+"hard drive(s)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:136
+msgid ""
+"If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> "
+"option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to "
+"the following rules:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:142
+msgid ""
+"If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is "
+"created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root)  partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:148
+msgid ""
+"If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions "
+"are created"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:153
+msgid ""
+"6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename> "
+"with a maximum of 50 GB"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:158
+msgid "1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:163
+msgid "the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:170
+msgid ""
+"This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will "
+"create three partitions:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:175
+msgid "50 GB for <filename>/</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:179
+msgid "4 GB for <filename>swap</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:183
+msgid "and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:188
+msgid ""
+"If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be "
+"automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted "
+"on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</"
+"emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly "
+"done."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:194
+msgid ""
+"If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned "
+"disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already exist. "
+"It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with the "
+"Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any "
+"other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for "
+"filesystem type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:201
+msgid "See <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/> for information on how to proceed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:226
+msgid ""
+"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the "
+"previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the "
+"partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a "
+"drive."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:231
+msgid ""
+"Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a "
+"device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an "
+"alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following "
+"settings:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:238
+msgid "<emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:242
+msgid "<emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:246
+msgid ""
+"Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:15 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:54 en/DrakLive.xml:16
+msgid "Installation from LIVE medium"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:15
+msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:23
+msgid "March 2016"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:25
+msgid "Mageia 5"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:30 en/DrakX-cover.xml:28
+msgid "The Official Documentation for Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:33 en/DrakX-cover.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:38 en/DrakLive.xml:25 en/DrakX-cover.xml:36
+#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:12 en/DrakX.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:42 en/DrakLive.xml:29 en/DrakX-cover.xml:40
+#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:15 en/DrakX.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:46 en/DrakX-cover.xml:44 en/DrakX-inline.xml:17
+#: en/DrakX.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:56 en/DrakLive.xml:19 en/DrakX-cover.xml:66
+#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:6 en/DrakX.xml:39 en/selectKeyboard.xml:49
+msgid "<note>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:57 en/DrakLive.xml:20 en/DrakX-cover.xml:67
+#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:7 en/DrakX.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:60 en/DrakLive.xml:23 en/DrakX-cover.xml:70
+#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:10 en/DrakX.xml:43 en/selectKeyboard.xml:56
+msgid "</note>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link "
+"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation "
+"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:13 en/DrakX-cover.xml:64 en/DrakX-inline.xml:3
+#: en/DrakX.xml:36
+msgid "Installation with DrakX"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date>
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:21
+msgid "February 2014"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark>
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:23
+msgid "Mageia 4"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:3
+msgid "Congratulations"
+msgstr "Norabona"
+
+#.  Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC
+#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.
+#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to "
+"remove the installation medium and reboot your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating "
+"system to start (if there are more than one on your computer)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install "
+"will be automatically selected and started."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:30
+msgid "Enjoy!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Visit <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/\">www.mageia.org/en/</link> "
+"if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/firewall.xml:16
+msgid "Firewall"
+msgstr "Tornafuéu"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they "
+"determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the "
+"target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the "
+"system to be accessible from the Internet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/firewall.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-firewall.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-firewall.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is "
+"accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no firewall)</"
+"emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine - an option "
+"that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since it would "
+"create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the context of "
+"the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout)  for temporarily "
+"disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and debugging "
+"purposes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will "
+"enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible "
+"from the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:44
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Advanced</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable "
+"a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank "
+"separated)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:50
+msgid "<emphasis>&lt;port-number&gt;/&lt;protocol&gt;</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member>
+#: en/firewall.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"- <emphasis>&lt;port-number&gt;</emphasis> is the value of the port assigned "
+"to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as "
+"defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member>
+#: en/firewall.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"- <emphasis>&lt;protocol&gt;</emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> "
+"or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the "
+"service."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore "
+"is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/firewall.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 "
+"couples for the same port."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:10
+msgid "Formatting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 29 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 
+#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id="
+"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on "
+"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to "
+"check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on "
+"<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and "
+"then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where "
+"you can choose to view details of your partitions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"When you are confident about the selections, click on <emphasis>Next</"
+"emphasis> to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/graphicalConfiguration.xml:13
+msgid "Graphical Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:34
+msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
+"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
+"possible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:42
+msgid "The installation steps"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which "
+"is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"Each step has one or more screens, which may also have <emphasis>Advanced</"
+"emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details "
+"about the particular step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it "
+"is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a "
+"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
+"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
+"leave you with an unusable system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a "
+"text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> "
+"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that, "
+"press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Delete</"
+"keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:88
+msgid "Installation Welcome Screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the "
+"Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of "
+"the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will "
+"start the installer, and is normally all that you will need."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:99
+msgid "Legacy (BIOS) Systems"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will "
+"automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:119
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue System</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing "
+"Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:134
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:136
+msgid "Press F2 for alternative languages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:142
+msgid "UEFI Systems"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:144
+msgid ""
+"From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to "
+"enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap> "
+"to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:159
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:164
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either "
+"re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use "
+"it to restore a Windows bootloader."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:171
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language:</emphasis> Press <keycap>F2</keycap> "
+"for alternative languages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:176
+msgid ""
+"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, "
+"and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with \"USB\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:183
+msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:186
+msgid "No Graphical Interface"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language "
+"Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and "
+"older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command> "
+"at the prompt."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
+"In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use this press "
+"<keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen and confirm "
+"with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black screen with "
+"a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command> and press "
+"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:210
+msgid "The Install Freezes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a "
+"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware "
+"detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type "
+"<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined "
+"with other parameters as necessary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:220
+msgid "RAM problem"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:222
+msgid ""
+"This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
+"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
+"<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where "
+"<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of RAM. e.g. "
+"<literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:230
+msgid "Dynamic partitions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:232
+msgid ""
+"If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to "
+"<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not "
+"possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a <literal>Basic</"
+"literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link ns2:href=\"http://msdn."
+"microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/"
+"library/cc776315.aspx</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:16
+msgid "Updates"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been "
+"updated or improved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you "
+"aren't connected to the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:40
+msgid "Press <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><title>
+#: en/locale.xml:9
+msgid "Locale"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/login.xml:4
+msgid "Login Screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/login.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-"
+"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-"
+"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/login.xml:11
+msgid "SDDM login screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/login.xml:14
+msgid "Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/login.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find "
+"yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live "
+"medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/login.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can find further documentation in <link xmlns:ns0=\"http://www.w3."
+"org/1999/xlink\" ns0:href=\"../../installer/\">the Mageia wiki</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:10
+msgid "Available Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-11  - created 
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)
+#. 2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para.
+#. 2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
+"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains "
+"the base of the distribution."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
+"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
+"cards, etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
+"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
+"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
+"multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
+"to play commercial video DVD's, etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:3
+msgid "Minimal Install"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for "
+"Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use "
+"this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package selection</"
+"emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref linkend="
+"\"choosePackagesTree\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting "
+"everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see "
+"<xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package "
+"selection</emphasis> option in the same screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see "
+"screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as "
+"documentation and <quote>X</quote>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a "
+"lightweight desktop environment) will also be included."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and "
+"<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link xlink:"
+"href=\"http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html\">Linux Documentation Project</"
+"link> and the <link xlink:href=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/"
+"manual/\">GNU coreutils</link> info pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:3
+msgid "Configuration Summary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC
+#. 2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography.
+#. 2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.
+#. 2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png
+#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style
+#. 2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\" align=\"center\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\" align=\"center\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on "
+"the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the "
+"settings here and change them if you want by pressing <emphasis>Configure</"
+"emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings "
+"unless:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:33
+msgid "there are known issues with a default setting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:37
+msgid "the default setting has already been tried and it fails"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:41
+msgid "some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:49
+msgid "System parameters"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:54
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Timezone</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You "
+"can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:62
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Country / Region</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the "
+"setting.  See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:70
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:72
+msgid "DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more "
+"information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">User management</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own "
+"<filename>/home</filename> directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:91
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Services</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"System services refer to those small programs which run in the background "
+"(daemons).  This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may "
+"prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see "
+"<xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:106
+msgid "Hardware parameters"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:111
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Keyboard</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type "
+"of keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:118
+msgid ""
+"If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind "
+"that your passwords are going to change too."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:124
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Mouse</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs "
+"etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:131
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Sound card</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:133
+msgid "The installer will use the default driver if one is available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:136 en/soundConfig.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other "
+"possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, "
+"but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you "
+"can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:144
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical interface</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:146
+msgid ""
+"This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For "
+"more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:155
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:163
+msgid "Network and Internet parameters"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:169
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:171
+msgid ""
+"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free "
+"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control "
+"Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media "
+"repositories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:178
+msgid ""
+"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor "
+"that interface as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:185
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Proxies</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:187
+msgid ""
+"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider "
+"Internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a "
+"proxy service."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:192
+msgid ""
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters "
+"you need to enter here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:201
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Seguranza"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:206
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Level</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:208
+msgid ""
+"The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting "
+"(Standard)  is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits "
+"your usage."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:215
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Firewall</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:217
+msgid ""
+"The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on "
+"your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound "
+"connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your "
+"computer normally."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:223
+msgid ""
+"Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are "
+"continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly <quote>safe</"
+"quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as covert data "
+"channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:229
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:232
+msgid ""
+"Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may "
+"be very risky."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/reboot.xml:3
+msgid "Reboot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/reboot.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your "
+"computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><simpara>
+#: en/reboot.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">same</emphasis> order."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/reboot.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><simpara>
+#: en/reboot.xml:16
+msgid "When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><simpara>
+#: en/reboot.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These "
+"indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see "
+"<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/reboot.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-"
+"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-"
+"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"partition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition.  Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
+"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:10
+msgid "Security Level"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#. 2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for "
+"the average user."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for "
+"instance if the system is to be used as a public server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:36
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Administrator</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will "
+"send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations "
+"which require notification to a system administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter &lt;user&gt;@localhost - "
+"where &lt;user&gt; is the login name of the user to receive these messages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"The system sends such messages as <emphasis role=\"bold\">Unix Mailspool "
+"messages</emphasis>, not as \"ordinary\" SMTP mail: this user must therefore "
+"be configured for receiving such mail!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in "
+"the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:15
+msgid "Select and use ISOs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:18
+msgid "Introduction"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose "
+"which image best suits your needs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:21
+msgid "There are three types of installation media:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this "
+"media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to "
+"install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice "
+"of which Desktop environment to install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try "
+"out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to "
+"your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can "
+"be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating "
+"system itself."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you "
+"have fewer configuration options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations, "
+"they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's "
+"containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer "
+"and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that "
+"are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on "
+"the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if "
+"bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a "
+"DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:58
+msgid "More details are given in the next sections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:61
+msgid "Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:63
+msgid "Definition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to "
+"install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, "
+"USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"You can find Mageia ISO's <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/"
+"downloads/\">here</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:70
+msgid "Classical installation media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:72 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:104
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:171
+msgid "Common features"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:75
+msgid "These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:78
+msgid ""
+"They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously "
+"installed version of Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:82 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:118
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:174
+msgid "Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen: "
+"<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware "
+"Detection Tool</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:91
+msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:102
+msgid "Live media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install "
+"it"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:111
+msgid "The Live media also includes an Installer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:114
+msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:121
+msgid "They contain non-free software"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:126
+msgid "Live DVD Plasma"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:129
+msgid "Plasma desktop environment only"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:132 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:146
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:160
+msgid "All available languages are present"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:135 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:149
+msgid "64-bit architecture only"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:140
+msgid "Live DVD GNOME"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:143
+msgid "GNOME desktop environment only"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:154
+msgid "Live DVD Xfce"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:157
+msgid "Xfce desktop environment only"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:163
+msgid "32 or 64-bit architectures"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:169
+msgid "Net install media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:177
+msgid "First steps are English language only"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:182
+msgid "netinstall.iso"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:185
+msgid ""
+"Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free "
+"software"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:191
+msgid "netinstall-nonfree.iso"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:194
+msgid ""
+"Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:202
+msgid "Downloading and Checking Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:204
+msgid "Downloading"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:205
+msgid ""
+"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or "
+"BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as "
+"the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth "
+"is too low."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:209
+msgid ""
+"If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"<literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and "
+"<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO "
+"integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for "
+"use in the next section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:217
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:222
+msgid "In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:225
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:229
+msgid ""
+"Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:233
+msgid "Checking the integrity of the downloaded media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:235
+msgid ""
+"The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an "
+"algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of "
+"your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the "
+"checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not "
+"match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or "
+"attempt a repair using BitTorrent."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need "
+"to be root), and:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:245
+msgid ""
+"To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:249
+msgid ""
+"To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</"
+"command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:254
+msgid ""
+"To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</"
+"command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:258
+msgid "Example:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:260
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:265
+msgid ""
+"then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO "
+"checksum provided by Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:270
+msgid "Burn or dump the ISO"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:271
+msgid ""
+"The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a "
+"USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will "
+"actually be created."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:275
+msgid "Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:276
+msgid ""
+"Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis> "
+"image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or <emphasis>files</"
+"emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia wiki</link> for more information."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:282
+msgid "Dump the ISO to a USB stick"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:283
+msgid ""
+"All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick "
+"and then use that to boot and install the system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:286
+msgid ""
+"Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on "
+"the device and all existing data will be lost."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:290
+msgid ""
+"Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia "
+"ISO partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:292
+msgid ""
+"So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will "
+"then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer "
+"formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original "
+"capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:299
+msgid "Using a graphical tool within Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:300
+msgid ""
+"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:303
+msgid "Using a graphical tool within Windows"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:304
+msgid "You could try:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:307
+msgid ""
+"<link ns4:href=\"http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US\">Rufus</link> using the "
+"\"ISO image\" option"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:311
+msgid ""
+"<link ns4:href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager\">Win32 "
+"Disk Imager</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:317
+msgid "Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:319
+msgid ""
+"It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting "
+"potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:325
+msgid "Open a console"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:328
+msgid ""
+"Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command "
+"<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:332
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Root.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Root.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:338
+msgid ""
+"Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open "
+"any application or file manager that could access or read it)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:343
+msgid "Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:345
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:351
+msgid ""
+"Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example "
+"<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:354
+msgid ""
+"Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command <command>dmesg</"
+"command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can see the device "
+"name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case, <filename>sdd</"
+"filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its size is 2GB:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><screen>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360
+#, no-wrap
+msgid ""
+"[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd\n"
+"[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000\n"
+"[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3\n"
+"[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device\n"
+"[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash\n"
+"[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB\n"
+"[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n"
+"[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n"
+"[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected\n"
+"[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0\n"
+"[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access     JetFlash Transcend 2GB    1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4\n"
+"[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)\n"
+"[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off\n"
+"[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00\n"
+"[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found\n"
+"[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through\n"
+"[72595.967251]  <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1\n"
+"[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:380
+msgid ""
+"Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/"
+"sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:382
+msgid ""
+"Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg: <filename>/dev/sdd</"
+"filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:384
+msgid ""
+"Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/"
+"sdd bs=1M</literal>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><tip><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:388
+msgid ""
+"It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role=\"bold\">if</emphasis> "
+"stands for <emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role=\"bold\">of</emphasis> stands for "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role=\"bold\">f</"
+"emphasis>ile"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:392
+msgid "Enter the command: <command>sync</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:395
+msgid "This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:3
+msgid "Select your Country / Region"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6
+#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography.
+#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align="
+"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, "
+"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country "
+"can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other Countries</"
+"emphasis> option and choose your country / region there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list, "
+"after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the "
+"main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:42
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
+"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"default input method, so users should not need to configure it manually. "
+"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions "
+"and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it "
+"post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu> "
+"<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running "
+"<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:29
+msgid "Install or Upgrade"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format "
+"the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can "
+"preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated /"
+"home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) partition "
+"itself)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:50
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Upgrade</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:52
+msgid "Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still "
+"supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been "
+"thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached "
+"its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a <quote>clean</"
+"quote> install instead, while preserving your <filename>/home</filename> "
+"partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
+"can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the "
+"language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> "
+"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis role="
+"\"bold\"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:14
+msgid "Select Keyboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:24
+msgid "Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia​​."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based "
+"upon your previously selected language and timezone choices."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:20
+msgid "Keyboard"
+msgstr "Tecláu"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
+"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
+"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
+"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis> "
+"to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue, "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as "
+"though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this "
+"and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will "
+"be applied."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an "
+"extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the "
+"Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:34
+msgid "Please choose a language to use"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your "
+"continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for "
+"your installed system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the "
+"installation and for your installed system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be "
+"installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple "
+"languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add "
+"extra language support after installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><important><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your "
+"preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked "
+"as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then "
+"it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:82
+msgid ""
+"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the "
+"<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is "
+"inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed "
+"languages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"You can change the language for your system post-installation in the "
+"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>System</"
+"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>localization for your system</guimenuitem> </"
+"menuchoice>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:10
+msgid "Select mouse"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 11 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot 
+#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
+"different one here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and "
+"USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force evdev</"
+"guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work on a "
+"mouse with six or more buttons."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:7
+msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the "
+"software <emphasis role=\"bold\">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead "
+"(available in the Mageia repositories)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"For more information, see: <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-"
+"efi_and_Mageia\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32
+msgid "Bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36
+msgid "Available Bootloaders"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:39
+msgid "Grub2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:42
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the "
+"bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master "
+"Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:59
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:63
+msgid "GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI "
+"System Partition)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer "
+"(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP "
+"created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it.  If no ESP exists, then one will "
+"be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is "
+"required, whatever the number of operating systems you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:82
+msgid "rEFInd"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:85
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:88
+msgid ""
+"rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed "
+"EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal> "
+"option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system "
+"architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit "
+"machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available "
+"to you."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:106
+msgid "Bootloader Setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:110
+msgid "Bootloader main options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-"
+"im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-"
+"im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:125
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader to use</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"<guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu), "
+"can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and "
+"<literal>UEFI</literal> systems."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:136
+msgid ""
+"<guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu)  is an alternative "
+"option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:144
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot device</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:147
+msgid "Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:152
+msgid ""
+"There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: "
+"<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:157
+msgid ""
+"When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be "
+"listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:166
+msgid ""
+"This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating "
+"system is started up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:171
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:173
+msgid ""
+"This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username "
+"and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting "
+"entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely "
+"to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the "
+"password is the one chosen hereafter."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:184
+msgid "Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:188
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again)</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set "
+"above"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:195 en/setupBootloader.xml:308
+msgid "<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:199
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:201
+msgid ""
+"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power "
+"management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it "
+"could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if "
+"you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance "
+"random reboots or system lockups)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:210
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core "
+"processors"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:217
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:219
+msgid ""
+"Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable "
+"Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and "
+"Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request)  management."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:226
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:228
+msgid ""
+"Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a "
+"specific processor in an SMP system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:235
+msgid "Bootloader Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:237
+msgid ""
+"If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the "
+"bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the "
+"screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the "
+"subsequent screenshot for your options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:243
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> "
+"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:253
+msgid "Your rEFInd configuration options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:256
+msgid ""
+"<guimenuitem>Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system partition.</"
+"guimenuitem>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:261
+msgid ""
+"<guimenuitem>Install in EFI/Boot partition (workaround for some BIOS's).</"
+"guimenuitem>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:264
+msgid ""
+"With some BIOS's, the newly written bootloader for Mageia at end of the "
+"installation will not be recognized. In that case, you can use this option "
+"as a workaround for the issue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:270
+msgid ""
+"If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous "
+"section, then your bootloader configurations are shown below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:275
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:286
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Default</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:288
+msgid "The operating system to be started up by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:292
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Append</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:294
+msgid ""
+"This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to "
+"give you more information as it boots."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:299
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Probe foreign OS</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:301
+msgid ""
+"If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to "
+"add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, "
+"then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:311
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live"
+"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:322
+msgid "<emphasis>Video mode</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:324
+msgid ""
+"This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If "
+"you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth "
+"options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:330
+msgid "<emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:332
+msgid ""
+"Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather "
+"chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is "
+"missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you "
+"understand the implications, and wish to proceed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:338
+msgid ""
+"Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo)  is no longer "
+"supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this "
+"resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or "
+"rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:348
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:356
+msgid "Other Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:359
+msgid "Using an existing bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:361
+msgid ""
+"The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond "
+"the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect "
+"Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the "
+"documentation for the relevant operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:370
+msgid "Installing Without a Bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:372
+msgid ""
+"While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 "
+"Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are "
+"doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be "
+"unable to start."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:10
+msgid "Setup SCSI"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 02 
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
+#.  JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 
+#.  SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) 
+#.  barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. 
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+#.        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file 
+#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.
+#. 2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older "
+"SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use "
+"and subsequently fail to recognise the drive."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which "
+"SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) "
+"correctly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><title>
+#: en/software.xml:4
+msgid "Software"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/software.xml:7
+msgid "Media Selection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:10
+msgid "Sound Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC
+#. 2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography.
+#. 2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the "
+"installer, and this driver should work without problems."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run "
+"<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice> "
+"<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem> "
+"<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the "
+"<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis> "
+"screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice "
+"about how to solve the problem."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:43
+msgid "Advanced"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:10
+msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 03 
+#.  test comment - johnr 
+#.  2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+#.     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+#.     saw this help screen when I had only one HD 
+#.  2013-05-05 marja added screenshot 
+#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography
+#. 2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-"
+"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-"
+"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK "
+"to erase <emphasis role=\"bold\">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role=\"bold\">all "
+"data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:11
+msgid "Testing Mageia as Live system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:16
+msgid "Live mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/testing.xml:23
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:30
+msgid "Testing hardware"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is "
+"correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in "
+"the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:40
+msgid "network interface: configure it with net_applet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:44
+msgid "graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:49
+msgid "sound: a jingle has already been played"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:53
+msgid "printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:57
+msgid "scanner: scan a document from ..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If "
+"not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to "
+"proceed with the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:73
+msgid "Launch installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, "
+"simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live "
+"desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link linkend="
+"\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</link> step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/testing.xml:82
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:10
+msgid "Uninstalling Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short "
+"you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the "
+"possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select "
+"<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot "
+"loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no "
+"option to choose your Mageia operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on "
+"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control Panel</"
+"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem> "
+"<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Storage</"
+"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You "
+"will recognise a Mageia partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</"
+"literal>, and also by their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each "
+"of these partitions and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the "
+"space."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it "
+"(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the "
+"existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other "
+"partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As always, when "
+"changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything important to you."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/unused.xml:3
+msgid "Keep or delete unused material"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. 2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6.
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/unused.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-"
+"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-"
+"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/unused.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused "
+"hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/unused.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on "
+"different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files "
+"then you might wish to accept this proposal."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/unused.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and "
+"localization files that will be removed if you proceed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/unused.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/"
+"> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/unused.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just "
+"take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a "
+"blank screen - this is normal."
+msgstr ""
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive-cover.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e4d0747a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive-cover.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<book version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="DrakLive-installer"
+      xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+      xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+      xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+      xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+      xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+      xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+      xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/02/19 apb: Disabled setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml because I have included it at the end of setupBootloader.xml-->
+<!--2018/03/24 apb: Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml, ask_mntpoint_s.xml, takeOverHdConfirm.xml, diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml because I have grouped them together under diskPartitioning.xml (as per DrakX)-->
+<title>Installation from LIVE medium</title>
+
+    <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>
+
+    <revhistory>
+      <revision>
+        <date>March 2016</date>
+
+        <revremark>Mageia 5</revremark>
+      </revision>
+    </revhistory>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  <article>
+    <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title>
+
+    <para><note>
+        <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+      </note></para>
+
+    <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="testing.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+
+    <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="unused.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+ -->
+<xi:include href="reboot.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="login.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+  </article>
+</book>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ba43133c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<article version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/02/16 apb: Comment-out setupBootloaderAddEntry because I have incorporated it at the end of setupBootloader-->
+<!--2018/03/23 apb: a) Using diskPartitioning.xml to group doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml 
+b) Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml This is to reflect same arrangement in DrakX-->
+<title>Installation from LIVE medium</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="testing.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+ -->
+<xi:include href="reboot.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="login.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-cover.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1f9cb49e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-cover.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<book version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup"
+      xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+      xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+      xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion"
+      xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+      xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+      xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+      xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+      xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title>Installation with DrakX</title>
+
+    <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>
+
+    <revhistory>
+      <revision>
+        <date>February 2014</date>
+
+        <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark>
+      </revision>
+    </revhistory>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  <article>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<!--2019-01-12 apb: add graphicalConfiguration.xml to group the 3 configureX xml's. -->
+<title>Installation with DrakX</title>
+
+    <para><note>
+        <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+      </note></para>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+ -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>-->
+<!-- <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="software.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+
+    <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+ -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="locale.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+  </article>
+</book>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-inline.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-inline.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a5f94904
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-inline.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+  <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur-->
+<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+    <title>Installation with DrakX</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:inclu de> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+</article>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2092483c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+         xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+    <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur-->
+<!--2018/02/16 apb: 1st run towards improving Mga7 DrakX manual - Text and typography done for all required xml's.
+  Also, removed the inclusion for setupBootladerAddEntry (was section 24) as I have appended it to the end of section 23 (Bootloader).-->
+<!--2018/02/23 apb: Disabled Include for configureX_card_list.xml & configureX_monitor.xml because there is no point to them being Siblings to configureX_chooser.xml (Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration). They are really Children.-->
+<!--2018/02/27 apb: a) Created this section to merge doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml
+  b) renamed doPartitionDisks.xml as suggestedPartitioning.xml c) These XML's now exist as xi:includes within the newly created partitionig.xml -->
+<!--2018/02/27 apb: Merged configureTimezoneUTC.xml and selectCountry.xml within newly created Locale.xml. b) Disabled configureTimezoneUTC.xml and selectCountry.xml Includes and inserted Locale include.-->
+<!--2019/01/12 apb: add graphicalConfiguration.xml to hold the configureX xml's.-->
+<title>Installation with DrakX</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+ -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>-->
+<!-- <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="software.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+ -->
+<!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="locale.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7796bbb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,384 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs">
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 
+
+Lebarhon updated for Mageia 6 2016 12 16 (still waiting for clarification about 1.3.2-->
+<!--2018/02/07 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Typo-->
+<!--2018/02/19 apb: Update Download.png to Mga6.-->
+<!--2018/02/20 apb: Adjusted sections 1.1 and 1.2.
+  a) The main intro previously stated that there were 2 families of media, but listed at 1.2.4 is NetInstall. Therefore, I included a NetInstall entry in 1.1.
+  b) Logically followed to move the NetInstall description up frome 1.2.4 to the main intro.
+  c) Moved the 'Important' text from Live 1.2.3.1 Common features to the main intro because it is not really part of 'Common features', and I think its more natural location is in the main intro.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Centre-align all PNG's.-->
+<!--2019/01/03 apb: Update checking.png (which also includes sha512 option). Some rewording to 1.2.4.2, 1.3.1, 1.4.2.3.5. Update text to include sha512 option in 1.3.1 & 1.3.2-->
+<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title>
+  </info>
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose
+which image best suits your needs.</para>
+    <para>There are three types of installation media:</para>
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this
+media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to
+install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice
+of which Desktop environment to install.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try
+out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to
+your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can
+be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating
+system itself.</para>
+        <note>
+          <para>The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you
+have fewer configuration options.</para>
+        </note>
+        <important>
+          <para>Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations,
+they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases.</para>
+        </important>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's
+containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer
+and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that
+are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on
+the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet.</para>
+        <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if
+bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a
+DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <para>More details are given in the next sections.</para>
+  </section>
+  <section>
+    <title>Media</title>
+    <section>
+      <title>Definition</title>
+      <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to
+install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD,
+USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to.</para>
+      <para>You can find Mageia ISO's <link
+ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para>
+    </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Classical installation media</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Common features</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously
+installed version of Mageia</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen:
+<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware
+Detection Tool</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Live media</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Common features</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install
+it</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The Live media also includes an Installer.</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>They contain non-free software</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>Live DVD Plasma</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Plasma desktop environment only</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>All available languages are present</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>64-bit architecture only</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>Live DVD GNOME</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>GNOME desktop environment only</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>All available languages are present</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>64-bit architecture only</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>Live DVD Xfce</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Xfce desktop environment only</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>All available languages are present</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>32 or 64-bit architectures</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Net install media</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Common features</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>First steps are English language only</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>netinstall.iso</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free
+software</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>netinstall-nonfree.iso</title>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+  <section>
+    <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title>
+    <section>
+      <title>Downloading</title>
+      <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or
+BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as
+the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth
+is too low.</para>
+      <para>If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums.</para>
+
+      <para><literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and
+<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO
+integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for
+use in the next section.</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Checking.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Download.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+      <para>Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>.</para>
+    </section>
+    <section>
+      <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the integrity of the downloaded media</title>
+      <para>The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an
+algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of
+your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the
+checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not
+match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or
+attempt a repair using BitTorrent.</para>
+      <para>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need
+to be root), and:</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      <para>Example:</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Md5sum.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO
+checksum provided by Mageia.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+  <section>
+    <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title>
+    <para>The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a
+USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will
+actually be created.</para>
+    <section>
+      <title>Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD</title>
+      <para>Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis>
+image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or
+<emphasis>files</emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia
+wiki</link> for more information.</para>
+    </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title>
+      <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick
+and then use that to boot and install the system.</para>
+      <warning>
+        <para>Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on
+the device and all existing data will be lost.</para>
+      </warning>
+      <note>
+        <para>Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia
+ISO partition.</para>
+        <para>So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will
+then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer
+formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original
+capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick.</para>
+      </note>
+      <section>
+        <title>Using a graphical tool within Mageia</title>
+        <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>Using a graphical tool within Windows</title>
+        <para>You could try:</para>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the
+"ISO image" option</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 Disk
+Imager</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+      <section>
+        <title>Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system</title>
+        <warning>
+          <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting
+potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device.</para>
+        </warning>
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Open a console</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command
+<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )</para>
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open
+any application or file manager that could access or read it)</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command></para>
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example
+<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick.</para>
+            <para>Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command
+<command>dmesg</command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can
+see the device name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case,
+<filename>sdd</filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its
+size is 2GB:</para>
+            <para><screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd
+[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000
+[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
+[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device
+[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash
+[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB
+[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes
+[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes
+[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected
+[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0
+[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access     JetFlash Transcend 2GB    1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4
+[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)
+[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off
+[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00
+[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found
+[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through
+[72595.967251]  <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1
+[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen></para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file
+of=/dev/sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command></para>
+            <para>Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg:
+<filename>/dev/sdd</filename></para>
+            <para>Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso
+of=/dev/sdd bs=1M</literal></para>
+            <tip>
+              <para>It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role="bold">if</emphasis> stands
+for <emphasis role="bold">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis
+role="bold">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role="bold">of</emphasis> stands
+for <emphasis role="bold">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis
+role="bold">f</emphasis>ile</para>
+            </tip>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the command: <command>sync</command></para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/acceptLicense.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a57a2b8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="acceptLicense" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications:
+       http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html  -->
+<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore,
+       but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( 
+       ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one-->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not 
+       sure what is causing the corruption -->
+<!-- JohnR  2012-04-19 language proofreading -->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-license.png to Mga6.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Slight reword to '..thanks for looking' sentence.-->
+<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">License and Release Notes</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" fileref="dx2-license.png" align="center"
+revision="4"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-license.png" xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" revision="5"
+align="center" condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="license">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="license-ti1">License Agreement</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions
+carefully.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must
+be accepted before you can continue.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on
+<emphasis>Next</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your
+interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your
+computer.</para>
+
+    
+  <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section -
+       marja, 20120405  -->
+</section>
+
+  <section xml:id="releaseNotes">
+    <!--
+  <para>
+Release Notes</para>
+-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">Release Notes</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+    <para>Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by
+clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/addUser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ffa2e228
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/addUser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="addUser" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">User Management</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)-->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6.-->
+<!--2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management).
+  Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'.-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style.-->
+<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png.-->
+<!--2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text.-->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live">
+<imagedata fileref="live-user1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="root-password">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Set Administrator (root)  Password:</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a
+<literal>superuser</literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the
+<emphasis>root </emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same
+password in the box underneath, to check that the first entry was not
+mistyped.</para>
+
+    <note xml:id="givePassword">
+      <para>As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from
+red-to-yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green
+shield shows you are using a strong password.</para>
+
+      <para>All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters
+(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="enterUser">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Enter a user</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the
+<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office
+applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a
+computer for.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Icon</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Click on this button if you want to change the user's icon</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Real Name</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Insert the user's real name into this text box</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Name</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real
+name. <emphasis role="bold">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis></para>
+
+        <caution condition="live">
+          <simpara>The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for
+your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be
+written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as
+Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data...</simpara>
+        </caution>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above).</para>
+
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user
+password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is
+both read and write protected (umask=0027)</para>
+
+      <para>You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration -
+Summary</emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User
+management</emphasis>.</para>
+
+      <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section condition="classical" xml:id="addUserAdvanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">User Management (advanced)</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings
+for the user you are adding.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the
+shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are
+<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you
+added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is,
+then leave it blank.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID.  Again, if
+unsure, leave it blank.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/add_supplemental_media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b7fa7960
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Supplemental Installation Media</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy.-->
+<!--2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1" align="center" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can
+add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source.
+The source selection determines which packages will be available during the
+subsequent steps.</para>
+
+  <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Choosing and activating the network, if not already up.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the
+<emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the
+<emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific
+repository or your own NFS installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit
+packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by
+selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only
+contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be
+able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror,
+the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there.</para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4709de7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Choose the mount points</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+       with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) -->
+<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+       write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
+<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
+<!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points.-->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If
+you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points
+yourself.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For
+example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and
+<filename>5</filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed
+by the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the
+partition.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If you have several partitions, you can choose various different
+<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as
+<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and
+<filename>/var</filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for
+instance <filename>/video</filename> for a partition where you want to store
+your films, or perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the
+mount point field blank.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename>
+(root) partition.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to
+go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where
+you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on
+<emphasis>Next</emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the
+partition suggested by DrakX, or more.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bestTime.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bestTime.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..614c09ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bestTime.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="bestTime">
+  
+  
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/03/01 apb: Slight adjustment to text-->
+<!--2018/03/03/ apb: Redo definition for the Advanced option,-->
+<title xml:id="bestTime-ti1">Clock Settings</title>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject condition="live">
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" align="center"
+fileref="live-bestTime.png" revision="1" xml:id="bestTime-im1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+  <para>Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local
+time or UTC time.</para>
+  <para>In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time
+synchronization and specify an NTP server.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bootLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bootLive.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f089673
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bootLive.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/03/01 apb: a) center-align live-bootCSM.png b) Redo/expand text.-->
+<!--2018/02/02 apb: a) update live-bootCSM.png and redo corresponding text.-->
+<!--2018/02/03 apb: a) A couple of typos and slight adjustment to some text. b) Added definition for F6 Default boot option.-->
+<!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.2 - F6 last sentence typo.-->
+<!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.2 - Update SC (live-bootCSM.png) and text to reflect changes to Mga7 options.-->
+<!--2019/01/08 apb: 1.2 - Add text for Memtest option. 1.3 - Update live-bootUEFI.png and add text for F2 Language option.-->
+<!--2019/01/11 apb: 1.3 - Boot Mageia: change Dvd ->
+ DVD.-->
+<title xml:id="bootLive-ti1">Boot Mageia as Live system</title>
+  </info>
+  <section xml:id="bootLive-1">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="bootLive1-ti1">Booting the medium</title>
+    </info>
+    <para>You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug
+the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer.</para>
+    <para>If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need
+to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try
+accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer
+will boot.</para>
+    <tip>
+      <para>To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try
+pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or
+<keycap>Esc</keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>,
+<keycap>F8</keycap>, <keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the
+boot device menu. These (fairly common) keys are just a selection of
+possible options though.</para>
+    </tip>
+    <note>
+      <para>The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media
+will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or
+UEFI type.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+  <section xml:id="biosmode">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="biosmode-ti1">In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode</title>
+    </info>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-bootCSM.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject>
+      <caption>
+        <para>First screen while booting in BIOS mode</para>
+      </caption>
+    </mediaobject>
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <title>Menu</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot Mageia</emphasis></para>
+        <para>This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB
+media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS).</para>
+        <para>Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation.</para>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis role="bold">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to
+boot)</emphasis></para>
+            <para>Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para>
+        <para>This option will install Mageia to a hard disk.</para>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis role="bold">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to
+boot)</emphasis></para>
+            <para>Install Mageia using non-free video drivers</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Memory Test</emphasis></para>
+        <para>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write
+operations. Reboot to end the test.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold"> F2 Language</emphasis></para>
+        <para>Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language
+during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then
+press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+  <section xml:id="uefimode">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="uefimode-ti1">In UEFI mode</title>
+    </info>
+    <mediaobject condition="live">
+      <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="../live-bootUEFI.png"
+align="center" xml:id="bootUEFI-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+      <caption>
+        <para>First screen while booting in UEFI mode</para>
+      </caption>
+    </mediaobject>
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <title>Menu</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot Mageia</emphasis></para>
+        <para>This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB
+media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS).  Once the
+boot is done, you can proceed to the installation</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para>
+        <para>This option will install Mageia to a hard disk.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold"> F2 Language</emphasis></para>
+        <para>Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language
+during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then
+press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <note>
+      <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options
+duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will
+be suffixed with "USB".</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/chooseDesktop.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aab1332f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="chooseDesktop"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <!--Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC-->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<info>
+    <!--2018/02/12 apb: Some wording and typograpy.-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Change last 2 paras to bulleted-->
+<!--2019/01/05 apb: Slight reword to para's 1,2 & 4.-->
+<title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">Desktop Selection</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <para>Some choices made here will open other screens with related options.</para>
+
+  <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the
+installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing
+the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop
+environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or,
+actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software
+choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is
+lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer
+packages installed by default.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackageGroups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e8144505
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="choosePackageGroups" xreflabel="Choose Package Groups">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">Package Group Selection</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!--Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on
+your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however
+more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which
+become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Workstation</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Server</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphical Environment</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use
+this option to manually add or remove packages</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>See <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a
+minimal install (without or with X &amp; IceWM).</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackagesTree.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0346465e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="choosePackagesTree" xreflabel="Choose Packages Tree" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Choose Individual Packages</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your
+installation.</para>
+
+  <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the
+<emphasis>floppy</emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your
+choice of packages (saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this
+file to install the same packages on another system, by pressing the same
+button during install and choosing to load it.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureServices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..863021a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureServices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Configure Services" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="configureServices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configure your Services</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<!-- 2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+xml:id="configureServices-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa1" revision="1">Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="configureServices-pa2" revision="1">Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The
+settings DrakX chose are usually good.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="configureServices-pa4" revision="1">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info
+box below.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa5" revision="1">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5bac9dff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Configure Timezone" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure your Timezone</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<!--2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.-->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="png"
+fileref="live-timeZone.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1" revision="1">Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the
+same timezone.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2" revision="1">In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time
+or to GMT, also known as UTC.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they
+are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_card_list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bc76c51a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"
+         xreflabel="Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+         xml:id="configureX_card_list" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
+<!-- tproof  -->
+<!-- lproof  -->
+<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur  -->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/21 apb: Merge last 2 paras + slight reword.-->
+<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added xreflabel-->
+<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually
+correctly identify your video device.</para>
+
+  <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know
+which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Vendor</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>then the make of your card</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>and the model of card</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and
+open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver
+for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides
+basic capabilities.</para>
+
+  <caution>
+    <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis></para>
+  </caution>
+
+  <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in
+some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The
+<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to
+access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after
+your first reboot.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_chooser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0f8c0799
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration"
+         xml:id="configureX_chooser" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Some text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/21 apb: a) Changed main options list style. b) Slight reword of 'wrong refresh rates' warning.-->
+<!--2018/02/23 apb: Typo.-->
+<!--2019/01/06 apb: Slight reword, split 1st para in two.-->
+<!--2019/08/10 apb: [1] Added xreflabel. [2] Changed all instances of 'Graphic Card' to Graphics Card-->
+<title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment)
+you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user
+interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply
+<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other
+graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings
+need to be correct.</para>
+
+  <para>Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are
+incorrect, or if none are shown.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis role="bold">Graphics Card</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable
+list. See <xref linkend="configureX_card_list"/>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis role="bold">Monitor</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the
+<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose
+<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and
+vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref
+linkend="configureX_monitor"/>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Resolution</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis role="bold">Test</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is
+there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your
+settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings
+will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration
+screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is
+satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your
+settings are on the safe side.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis role="bold">Options</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Here you can choose to enable or disable various options.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are
+outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT
+displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally
+enter standby mode.</para>
+  </warning>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_monitor.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..36d76a10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Choosing your Monitor"
+         xml:id="configureX_monitor" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!---->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Change list style.-->
+<!--2019/01/06 apb: Slight rewording.-->
+<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added xreflabel.-->
+<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
+correctly identify yours.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis role="bold">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics
+could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something
+without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <variablelist spacing="compact">
+    <varlistentry>
+      <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2">Custom</term>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh
+rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the
+screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are
+displayed.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor
+type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you
+may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+
+    <varlistentry>
+      <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5">Plug'n Play</term>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor
+type from the monitor database.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+
+    <varlistentry>
+      <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7">Vendor</term>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
+one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+  </variablelist>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Manufacturer</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Monitor model</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <variablelist spacing="compact">
+    <varlistentry>
+      <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9">Generic</term>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such
+as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops.
+This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA
+card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined
+automatically. Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your
+selections.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+  </variablelist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskPartitioning.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskPartitioning.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0e8e014d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskPartitioning.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Partitioning" xml:id="diskPartitioning" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  
+
+  <!--2018/02/27 apb: Created this XML to group the Partitioning-related elements.-->
+<title>Partitioning</title>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..927b3c09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="DiskDrake" xml:id="diskdrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6
+
+Lebarhon 20170902 added SC-->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Fix a couple of tags that were out of place + added 'xreflabel="DiskDrake" at start of doc.-->
+<!--2018/02/27 apb: Reformat the text and add titles for the boot partition SC's.-->
+<!--2019/01/05 apb: Slight reword to 1st bullet-point.-->
+<!--2019/08/06 apb: Slight reword to 2nd bullet-point (was mentioning sda & sdb tabs in previous SC version).-->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live">
+<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions,
+change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details
+before you start.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage
+device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>,
+<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it,
+or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe
+it. <emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label
+(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click
+<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you
+are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you
+must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename>
+partition. The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename>
+partition must NOT be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </warning>
+
+  <important>
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System
+Partition) is present and correctly mounted on
+<filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. See Figure 1 below.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot
+partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </important>
+
+  <figure>
+    <title>EFI System Partition</title>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live">
+<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+  <figure>
+    <title>BIOS boot partition</title>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/doPartitionDisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0f084a3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="doPartitionDisks"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--lebarhon 20161216 updated for Mageia 6
+  
+lebarhon 20170209 added SC-->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. Added link to diskdrake in 2nd Note-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align last two PNG's. Also, fix some wonky XML formatting.-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Moved 'Erase ...' & 'Custom ...' list items up with the other list items. I can see the reason for splitting the list with the example SC, 
+  but I think this way is clearer (flow) overall. I don't believe that combining the list will interfere with the example SC and the relevant list item.-->
+<!--2018/02/21 apb: Changed list styles.-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list styles.-->
+<!--2019/01/11 apb: Auto allocation of drive space rules: small edits for style consistency.-->
+<!--2019/07/06 apb: Added live-doPartitionDisksk.png, as it was previously sharing the DrakX screenshot.-->
+<!--2019/08/23 apb: Moved 'Important' note from 'Erase and Use Entire Disk' to 'Use Free Space on a Windows Partition'. Slight text tweak to to first para, 'Warning' and 'Important' -->
+<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Suggested Partitioning</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the
+DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to
+the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <title>Main Options</title>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have
+been found and may be used for the installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6"><emphasis role="bold">Use Free Space</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for
+your new Mageia installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8"><emphasis role="bold">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="suggestedPartitioning-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may
+offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia
+installation but see the warning below.</para>
+
+      <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in
+light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their
+intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by
+clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions.  See the following
+screenshot:<mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is
+a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important
+files before proceeding.</para>
+      </warning>
+
+      <important>
+        <para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">The partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down
+correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented,
+although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been
+moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia.</para>
+      </important>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12"><emphasis role="bold">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you
+intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data
+on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16"><emphasis role="bold">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your
+hard drive(s).</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>
+option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to
+the following rules:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is
+created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root)  partition.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions
+are created</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename>
+with a maximum of 50 GB</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will
+create three partitions:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>50 GB for <filename>/</filename></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>4 GB for <filename>swap</filename></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename></para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be
+automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted
+on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk
+partitioning</emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has
+been correctly done.</para>
+
+    <para>If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned
+disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already
+exist. It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with
+the Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any
+other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for
+filesystem type.</para>
+
+    <para>See <xref linkend="diskdrake"/> for information on how to proceed.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <important>
+    <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the
+partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a
+drive.</para>
+
+    <para>Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a
+device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an
+alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following
+settings:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</para>
+  </important>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/exitInstall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..33510636
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/exitInstall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Norabona</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC-->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
+align="center" revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa1" revision="2">You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to
+remove the installation medium and reboot your computer.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating
+system to start (if there are more than one on your computer).</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa3" revision="1">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install
+will be automatically selected and started.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa4" revision="1">Enjoy!</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa5" revision="1">Visit <link ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/">www.mageia.org/en/</link>
+if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/firewall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9f059928
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/firewall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Firewall" xml:id="firewall"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel for this section.-->
+<!--2019/07/23 apb: Added dx2-firewall.png for this section.-->
+<title xml:id="firewall-ti1">Tornafuéu</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="firewall-pa1">This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they
+determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the
+target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the
+system to be accessible from the Internet.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-firewall.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is
+accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no
+firewall)</emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine -
+an option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer
+since it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in
+the context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout)
+for temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and
+debugging purposes.</para>
+
+  <para>All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will
+enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible
+from the network.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable
+a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank
+separated)</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis>&lt;port-number&gt;/&lt;protocol&gt;</emphasis></para>
+
+  <simplelist>
+    <member>- <emphasis>&lt;port-number&gt;</emphasis> is the value of the port assigned
+to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as
+defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;</member>
+
+    <member>- <emphasis>&lt;protocol&gt;</emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis>
+or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the
+service.</member>
+  </simplelist>
+
+  <para>For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore
+is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para>In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2
+couples for the same port.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/formatPartitions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0d3b94eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="formatPartitions"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
+<!--2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on
+partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to
+check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on
+<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and
+then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where
+you can choose to view details of your partitions.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selections, click on
+<emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/graphicalConfiguration.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/graphicalConfiguration.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ced6d7c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/graphicalConfiguration.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="graphicalConfiguration"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2019/01/12 apb: Created this xml as parent for the 'configureX' xml's.-->
+<title xml:id="graphicalConfiguration-ti1">Graphical Configuration</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installUpdates.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dc77bfff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installUpdates.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installUpdates" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" 
+  xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
+<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added bullets to some text.-->
+<title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Updates</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="png" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+align="center" revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa1" revision="1">Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been
+updated or improved.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa2" revision="1">Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you
+aren't connected to the Internet</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa3" revision="1">Press <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dd1dfaee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="installer"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/02/11 apb: Text and typography. F6 Default option needs to be better defined.-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Removed instances of surplus para tags from before and after some itemizedlist tags. These were present in the import from Mga6 WS.
+  Some listitem end-tags were directly after mediaobject end-tags, while the main listitem element was above the mediaobject.
+  So I moved the listitem end-tags above the mediaobjects, to their natural positions. This also was in the imported XML.-->
+<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated welcome.png to Mga6.-->
+<!--2018/02/21 apb: a) Updated rest of BIOS PNG's, b) Refined text and reworked this XML.-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed main list type-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Split 1,1 Caution into 2 paras.-->
+<!--2018/02/27 apb: Fixed UEFI section nest level.-->
+<!--2018/03/16 apb: Fixed incorrect value for title installer-ti1 (leading to output error since last year in Documentation Workspace - and inherited here, when imported).-->
+<!--2019/01/02 apb: 1.2 Typo. 1.2.1: Update dx-welcome.png (BIOS Welcome screen) to Mga7 and strip text for the options which have been removed from the Mga7 Welcome screen.-->
+<!--2019/01/08 apb: 1.2.2: Update dx-welcome2.png (UEFI Welcome screen) to Mga7 and add text for F2 Languages option.-->
+<!--2019/07/17 apb: Force dx-welcome.png and dx-welcome2.png to be 800px wide.-->
+<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia
+Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as
+possible.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The installation steps</title>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which
+is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Each step has one or more screens, which may also have
+<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required
+options.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details
+about the particular step.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <caution>
+      <para>If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it
+is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a
+partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your
+computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well
+leave you with an unusable system.</para>
+
+      <para>If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a
+text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>
+<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that,
+press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap>
+<keycap>Delete</keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot.</para>
+    </caution>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Installation Welcome Screen</title>
+
+    <para>The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the
+Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of
+the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type.</para>
+
+    <para>The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will
+start the installer, and is normally all that you will need.</para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Legacy (BIOS) Systems</title>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <title>Menu</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will
+automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Rescue System</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing
+Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Memory Test</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write
+operations. Reboot to end the test.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">F2: Language</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Press F2 for alternative languages.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>UEFI Systems</title>
+
+      <para>From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to
+enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap>
+to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome2.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <title>Menu</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either
+re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use
+it to restore a Windows bootloader.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">F2: Language:</emphasis> Press <keycap>F2</keycap> for
+alternative languages.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated,
+and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with "USB".</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>No Graphical Interface</title>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language
+Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and
+older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command>
+at the prompt.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be
+possible. In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use
+this press <keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen
+and confirm with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black
+screen with a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command>
+and press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text
+mode.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>The Install Freezes</title>
+
+      <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a
+problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware
+detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type
+<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined
+with other parameters as necessary.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>RAM problem</title>
+
+      <para>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the
+available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the
+<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where
+<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of
+RAM. e.g. <literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Dynamic partitions</title>
+
+      <para>If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to
+<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not
+possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a
+<literal>Basic</literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link
+ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/locale.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/locale.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2ef5053d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/locale.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="locale" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+         xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <title>Locale</title>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/login.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/login.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7a0e5c62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/login.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="login" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/03/03 apb: a) Slight adjustment to text and change image caption from KDM to SDDM also change KDE to KDE Plasma. b) update SC to Mga6.-->
+<title xml:id="label-to-adapt-ti1">Login Screen</title>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject condition="live">
+    <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="login-im1"
+fileref="live-login.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+    <caption>
+      <para>SDDM login screen</para>
+    </caption>
+  </mediaobject>
+  <para>Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen.</para>
+  <para>Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find
+yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live
+medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia
+installation.</para>
+  <para>You can find further documentation in <link
+xmlns:ns0="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" ns0:href="../../installer/">the
+Mageia wiki</link>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/media_selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ae22cd0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/media_selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="media_selection"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Available Media</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
+<!--2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para.-->
+<!--2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are
+available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories
+selection determines which packages will be available for selection during
+the next steps.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains
+the base of the distribution.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are
+free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain
+closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this
+repository includes nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers,
+firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/minimal-install.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..56ae0f64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/minimal-install.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="minimal-install" xreflabel="Minimal Install" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to
+ start a new page-->
+<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Moved 'Minimal Instalation ...' para to top and rework the following paras.-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.-->
+<info>
+    <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimal Install</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for
+Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use
+this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package
+selection</emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref
+linkend="choosePackagesTree"/>.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting
+everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see
+<xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"/>.</para>
+
+      <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package
+selection</emphasis> option in the same screen.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see
+screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as
+documentation and <quote>X</quote>.</para>
+
+      <para>If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a
+lightweight desktop environment) will also be included.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and
+<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation
+Project</link> and the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU
+coreutils</link> info pages.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/misc-params.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..24febe44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/misc-params.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="misc-params">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Configuration Summary</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC-->
+<!--2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.-->
+<!--2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summaryTop.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on
+the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the
+settings here and change them if you want by pressing
+<emphasis>Configure</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings
+unless:<itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>there are known issues with a default setting</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>the default setting has already been tried and it fails</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </note>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-system">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Timezone</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You
+can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3"><emphasis role="bold">Country / Region</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the
+setting.  See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Bootloader</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a" revision="2">DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more
+information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para>
+
+        
+      <!-- revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c"-->
+</listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">User management</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a" revision="2">You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own
+<filename>/home</filename> directories.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Services</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run in the background
+(daemons).  This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may
+prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see
+<xref linkend="configureServices"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Keyboard</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type
+of keyboard.</para>
+
+        <note>
+          <para>If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind
+that your passwords are going to change too.</para>
+        </note>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Mouse</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a" revision="1">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs
+etc.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Sound card</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer will use the default driver if one is available.</para>
+
+        <para>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other
+possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case,
+but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you
+can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Graphical interface</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a" revision="1">This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For
+more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/></para>
+
+        
+      <!--revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b"-->
+</listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="summaryBottom-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-network">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free
+drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control
+Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media
+repositories.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor
+that interface as well.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Proxies</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider
+Internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a
+proxy service.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters
+you need to enter here.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-security">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">Seguranza</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1"><emphasis role="bold">Security Level</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a" revision="1">The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting
+(Standard)  is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits
+your usage.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Firewall</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b" revision="1">The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on
+your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound
+connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your
+computer normally.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1">Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are
+continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly
+<quote>safe</quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as
+covert data channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1">For more information, see <xref linkend="firewall"/>.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c" revision="1">Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may
+be very risky.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/reboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/reboot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b2ed272e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/reboot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="reboot">
+  <!--Lebarhon 20170210 updated for Mageia6-->
+<!--2018/03/03 apb: Slight text adjustment and update PNG's to Mga6.-->
+<info>
+    <title xml:id="reboot-ti1">Reboot</title>
+  </info>
+  
+  
+  <para>Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your
+computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer.</para>
+  <important>
+    <simpara>Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the
+<emphasis role="bold">same</emphasis> order.</simpara>
+  </important>
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-reboot2.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+  <simpara>When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>.</simpara>
+  <simpara>When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These
+indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see
+<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>).</simpara>
+  <mediaobject condition="live">
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="reboot-im1"
+fileref="live-reboot.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/resizeFATChoose.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..007c7bae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/resizeFATChoose.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+  version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="resizeFATChoose">
+   
+  
+
+    
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en
+  in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2-->
+<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>
+partition</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition.
+Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  
+   
+<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2">
+.......</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>-->
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/securityLevel.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9282f57f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/securityLevel.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="securityLevel"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Security Level</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1"><emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for
+the average user.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1"><emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for
+instance if the system is to be used as a public server.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Security Administrator</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will
+send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations
+which require notification to a system administrator.</para>
+
+  <para>A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter &lt;user&gt;@localhost -
+where &lt;user&gt; is the login name of the user to receive these messages.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>The system sends such messages as <emphasis role="bold">Unix Mailspool
+messages</emphasis>, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore
+be configured for receiving such mail!</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in
+the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectCountry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9302e7a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectCountry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectCountry" xreflabel="Select Country" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6-->
+<!--2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings,
+like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country
+can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other
+Countries</emphasis> option and choose your country / region there.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list,
+after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the
+main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <section xml:id="inputMethod">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa4" revision="1">In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an
+input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input
+multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the
+default input method, so users should not need to configure it
+manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar
+functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package
+selection.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa5" revision="1">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it
+post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running
+<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectInstallClass.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..20f1704e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectInstallClass"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR -->
+<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to
+      "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed  -->
+<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/20 apb: a) Changed list style - was bulleted. b) Removed warning about aborting the installation, as this is now at the intro of section 2 (DrakX, the Mageia Installer).-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: a) Changed list style.-->
+<!--2019/01/03 apb: a) Install: reword text about retaining an existing /home partition.-->
+<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Install or Upgrade</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+    <listitem>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format
+the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can
+preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated
+/home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/)
+partition itself).</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Upgrade</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <important>
+    <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still
+supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been
+thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached
+its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a
+<quote>clean</quote> install instead, while preserving your
+<filename>/home</filename> partition.</para>
+  </important>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you
+can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the
+language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>
+<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis
+role="bold"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..223735a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-selectKeyboard.png to Mga6.-->
+<!--2019/01/03 apb: Minor edit to Note (insert colon).-->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Tecláu</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable
+keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard
+layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the
+specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There
+may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also
+look here: <link
+xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis>
+to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there.</para>
+
+      <para revision="1"><note>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue,
+you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as
+though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this
+and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will
+be applied.</para>
+        </note></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
+extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the
+Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboardLive.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..426a7be0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboardLive.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2018/03/01 apb: Slight adjustment to text-->
+<!--2018/03/20 apb: Adjustment to text-->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-ti1">Select Keyboard</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-selectKeyboard.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia​​.</para>
+
+  <para>A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based
+upon your previously selected language and timezone choices.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectLanguage.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9b817052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectLanguage"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look -->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong
+       code in figure, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean
+       up mess made of this header by xxe -->
+<!--2018/09/02 apb: Text and typography. Classical/Live Conditions not respected in HTML or PDF output.-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Changed 'preferred language' Warning tag to Important-->
+<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-selectLanguage.png to Mga6.-->
+<!--2018/02/20 apb: Slight reword of 'Choosing more than one language'-->
+<!--2018/02/27 apb: Changed first 3 paras to Itemizedlist-->
+<!--2018/03/11 apb: Test to see if placing condition within listitem - rather than within para - will fix seeing both conditions together in output.-->
+<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Please choose a language to use</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem condition="classical">
+      <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your
+continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for
+your installed system.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem condition="live">
+      <para>Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the
+installation and for your installed system.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem condition="classical">
+      <para>If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be
+installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple
+languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add
+extra language support after installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-language.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <important condition="classical">
+    <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your
+preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked
+as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen.</para>
+  </important>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem condition="classical">
+      <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then
+it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the
+<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is
+inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed
+languages.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>You can change the language for your system post-installation in the
+<menuchoice> <guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>localization for your
+system</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectMouse.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectMouse.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..54877413
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectMouse.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectMouse"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place-->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot -->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a
+different one here.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and
+USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force
+evdev</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work
+on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloader.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7307e843
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Bootloader" xml:id="setupBootloader"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page 
+Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6.  20170209 updated SC-->
+<!--2018/02/06 apb: Modified the layout for a (hopefully) easier flow. Also commented-out setupBootloaderAddEntry (was section 24) and incorporated it here, at the end of this file.-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.-->
+<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed 'Advanced' list style.-->
+<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed main list style.-->
+<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.-->
+<!--2019/01/06 apb: Typo.-->
+<!--2019/01/06 apb: Use 'xi:include' for setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml, as that is how it is called by the inline-help drakx/perl routine.-->
+<!--2019/07/18 apb: Rewrite 1.1, to accomodate inclusion of rEFInd option, and modify 1.2.1, 1.2.2 accordingly.-->
+<!--2019/08/01 apb: 1.1.1 reworded to: GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system. Added warning text for 1.2.2 Do not Touch MBR/ESP part.-->
+<title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Bootloader</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Available Bootloaders</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Grub2</title>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis></para>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the
+bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master
+Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis></para>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI
+System Partition).</para>
+
+          <para>If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer
+(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP
+created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it.  If no ESP exists, then one will
+be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is
+required, whatever the number of operating systems you have.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>rEFInd</title>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis></para>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed
+EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal>
+option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system
+architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit
+machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available
+to you.</para>
+      </note>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti2">Bootloader Setup</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Bootloader main options</title>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader.png"
+xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Bootloader to use</emphasis></para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para><guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu),
+can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and
+<literal>UEFI</literal> systems.</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu)  is an alternative
+option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot device</emphasis></para>
+
+          <warning>
+            <para>Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing.</para>
+          </warning>
+
+          <note>
+            <para>There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g:
+<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable.</para>
+          </note>
+
+          <para>When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be
+listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating
+system is started up.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username
+and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting
+entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely
+to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the
+password is the one chosen hereafter.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Password (again)</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set
+above</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Advanced</emphasis></para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power
+management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it
+could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if
+you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance
+random reboots or system lockups).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core
+processors</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable
+Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and
+Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request)  management.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a
+specific processor in an SMP system</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Bootloader Configuration</title>
+
+      <para>If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the
+bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the
+screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the
+subsequent screenshot for your options.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="rEFIndLoaderConfig.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <para>Your rEFInd configuration options:</para>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><guimenuitem>Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system
+partition.</guimenuitem></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><guimenuitem>Install in EFI/Boot partition (workaround for some
+BIOS's).</guimenuitem></para>
+
+          <para>With some BIOS's, the newly written bootloader for Mageia at end of the
+installation will not be recognized. In that case, you can use this option
+as a workaround for the issue.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous
+section, then your bootloader configurations are shown below:</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>The operating system to be started up by default.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Append</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to
+give you more information as it boots.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis role="bold">Probe foreign OS</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to
+add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour,
+then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Advanced</emphasis></para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloader4.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-setupBootloader4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis>Video mode</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If
+you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth
+options.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis></para>
+
+          <para>Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather
+chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is
+missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you
+understand the implications, and wish to proceed.</para>
+
+          <warning>
+            <para>Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo)  is no longer
+supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this
+resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or
+rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!</para>
+          </warning>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-setupBootloader5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Other Options</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Using an existing bootloader</title>
+
+      <para>The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond
+the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve
+running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect
+Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the
+documentation for the relevant operating system.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Installing Without a Bootloader</title>
+
+      <para>While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1
+Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are
+doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be
+unable to start.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fd9150c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry">
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page
+
+Lebarhon 2016 12 16 Updated for Mageia 6-->
+<title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the
+software <emphasis role="bold">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead
+(available in the Mageia repositories).</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>For more information, see: <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link></para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e3b6c19b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="setupSCSI"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) -->
+<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+       Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older
+SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use
+and subsequently fail to recognise the drive.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which
+SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s)
+correctly.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/software.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/software.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b39da584
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/software.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="software" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Software">
+  
+
+  <!--2018/02/27 apb: Created this XML to gather together the XML's which can make up a Software group.-->
+<title>Software</title>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Media Selection</title>
+
+    <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+    <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+  </section>
+
+  <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/soundConfig.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f75056e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/soundConfig.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="soundConfig"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">Sound Configuration</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC-->
+<!--2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<!--2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="soundConfig-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the
+installer, and this driver should work without problems.</para>
+
+  <para>However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run
+<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the
+<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis>
+screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice
+about how to solve the problem.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">Advanced</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other
+possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case,
+but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you
+can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..df540a9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 -->
+<!-- test comment - johnr -->
+<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+    hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+    saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography-->
+<!--2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems.-->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your
+choice.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK
+to erase <emphasis role="bold">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis
+role="bold">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role="bold">all
+data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/testing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/testing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ed36491a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/testing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="testing" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.1.1 Remove empty 'webcam:' description relating to MCC/Hardware (and it is not an item there anyway).-->
+<title xml:id="testing-ti1">Testing Mageia as Live system</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <section xml:id="testing-1">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="testing1-ti1">Live mode</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis
+role="bold">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="testing2-ti1">Testing hardware</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <para>One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is
+correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in
+the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>network interface: configure it with net_applet</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>sound: a jingle has already been played</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>scanner: scan a document from ...</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If
+not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to
+proceed with the installation.</para>
+      </note>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="testing3-ti1">Launch installation</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <para>To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive,
+simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live
+desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link
+linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode-install.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/uninstall-Mageia.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2ec6161b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/uninstall-Mageia.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="uninstall-Mageia"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <!--Lebarhon 2015-07-06 Not true with UEFI 
+Lebarhon 2016 12 16 this page should be deleted or rewritten.-->
+<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.-->
+<info>
+    <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti1">Uninstalling Mageia</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short
+you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the
+possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para>
+
+  <para>After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select
+<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot
+loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no
+option to choose your Mageia operating system.</para>
+
+  <para>In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on
+<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control
+Panel</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Storage</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk
+Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You will recognise a Mageia
+partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</literal>, and also by
+their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each of these partitions
+and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the space.</para>
+
+  <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it
+(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter.</para>
+
+  <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the
+existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other
+partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis
+role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As
+always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything
+important to you.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/unused.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/unused.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4802228c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/unused.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="unused" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="unused-ti1">Keep or delete unused material</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="live">
+<!--2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6.-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="unused-im1"
+fileref="live-unused.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused
+hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them.</para>
+
+  <para>If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on
+different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files
+then you might wish to accept this proposal.</para>
+
+  <para>Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and
+localization files that will be removed if you proceed.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just
+take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a
+blank screen - this is normal.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast.po b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4fa6271a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast.po
@@ -0,0 +1,9596 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE
+# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Control Center Help package.
+#
+# Translators:
+# enolp <enolp@softastur.org>, 2015,2018,2020
+# Ḷḷumex03, 2014
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-09-08 15:28+0300\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-04-02 02:10+0000\n"
+"Last-Translator: enolp <enolp@softastur.org>\n"
+"Language-Team: Asturian (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/"
+"language/ast/)\n"
+"Language: ast\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11
+msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14
+msgid "diskdrake --dav"
+msgstr "diskdrake --dav"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:19
+msgid "diskdrake--dav1.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--dav1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure "
+"WebDAV shares</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21
+#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:20
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:18 en/draksambashare.xml:18 en/drakvpn.xml:16
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:27 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:41
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:27 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:46
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:17 en/system-config-printer.xml:21
+msgid "Introduction"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a "
+"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it "
+"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a "
+"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV "
+"server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40
+msgid "Creating a new entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if "
+"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. "
+"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.  Continue "
+"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking "
+"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the "
+"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct "
+"it, if needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:54
+msgid "diskdrake--dav3.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--dav3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount "
+"point."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other "
+"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:67
+msgid "diskdrake--dav4.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--dav4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the "
+"access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</"
+"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your new mount point is "
+"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked whether "
+"or not to save the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose "
+"this option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. "
+"If your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:12
+msgid "Share your hard disk partitions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15
+msgid "diskdrake --fileshare"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20
+msgid "diskdrake--fileshare.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--fileshare.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the "
+"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home "
+"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have "
+"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled "
+"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to "
+"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No "
+"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on "
+"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on "
+"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for "
+"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their "
+"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically "
+"created by the system. You will be asked about this later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you "
+"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>.  "
+"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on "
+"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both "
+"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any "
+"required packages will be installed if necessary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen.  In "
+"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows "
+"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare "
+"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, "
+"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the "
+"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information "
+"about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and "
+"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her "
+"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers "
+"have this facility."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/MCC-cover.xml:9 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/MCC.xml:1
+#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1
+msgid "en"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3
+msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6
+msgid "diskdrake --nfs"
+msgstr "diskdrake --nfs"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:11
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17
+msgid "."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare "
+"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The "
+"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix "
+"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. "
+"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a "
+"user with tools such as file browsers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38
+msgid "Procedure"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers "
+"which share directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the "
+"shared directories and select the directory you want to access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:47
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs2.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have "
+"to specify where to mount the directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:56
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs3.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and "
+"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After "
+"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:67
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs4.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs4.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:73
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs5.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, "
+"a message will displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab "
+"modifications\". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the "
+"network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file "
+"browser, for example in Dolphin."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:85
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs6.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3
+msgid "CD/DVD burner"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:5
+msgid "diskdrake --removable"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:10
+msgid "diskdrake--removable.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--removable.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is found under the tab "
+"Local disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your "
+"removable hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:20
+msgid "Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and "
+"the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change them. "
+"Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:28
+msgid "Mount point"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:37 en/harddrake2.xml:66
+msgid "Options"
+msgstr "Opciones"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the "
+"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:45
+msgid "user/nouser"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this "
+"option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is "
+"the only one who can umount it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11
+msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14
+msgid "diskdrake --smb"
+msgstr "diskdrake --smb"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare "
+"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The "
+"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) "
+"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared "
+"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with "
+"tools such as file browsers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of "
+"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who "
+"share directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"Click on the server name and on &gt; before the server name to display the "
+"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you "
+"have to specify where to mount the directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:52
+msgid "diskdrake--smb2.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount "
+"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the "
+"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to "
+"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it "
+"with the same button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:66
+msgid "diskdrake--smb3.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb3.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:72
+msgid "diskdrake--smb4.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask "
+"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow "
+"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The "
+"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:84
+msgid "diskdrake--smb5.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:3
+msgid "3D Desktop Effects"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:5
+msgid "drak3d"
+msgstr "drak3d"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:10
+msgid "drak3d.png"
+msgstr "drak3d.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D "
+"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by "
+"default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:25
+msgid "Getting Started"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the "
+"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can "
+"start."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.  Here you "
+"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or "
+"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/"
+"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your "
+"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of "
+"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be "
+"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</"
+"guibutton> button to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:45
+msgid "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png"
+msgstr "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz "
+"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in "
+"for the changes to take effect."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz "
+"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager)  tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:59
+msgid "Troubleshooting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:62
+msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop "
+"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in "
+"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:71
+msgid "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png"
+msgstr "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be "
+"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login "
+"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the "
+"log in problem."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:9
+msgid "Authentication"
+msgstr "Autenticación"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:11
+msgid "drakauth"
+msgstr "drakauth"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:16
+msgid "drakauth.png"
+msgstr "drakauth.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the "
+"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your "
+"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so "
+"and give information about that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:3
+msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:6
+msgid "drakautologin"
+msgstr "drakautologin"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:11
+msgid "drakautologin.png"
+msgstr "drakautologin.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakautologin</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to "
+"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without "
+"asking for any password. It's called autologin.  This is generally a good "
+"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the "
+"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:26
+msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</"
+"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If "
+"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible "
+"to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by launching the "
+"command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakautologin.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either "
+"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to "
+"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check "
+"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if "
+"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default "
+"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:3
+msgid "Set up boot system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:5
+msgid "drakboot"
+msgstr "drakboot"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:10
+msgid "drakboot--boot.png"
+msgstr "drakboot--boot.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is "
+"slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition "
+"(ESP)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:20
+msgid "drakboot--boot2.png"
+msgstr "drakboot--boot2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure "
+"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default "
+"boot, etc.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled \"Set up "
+"boot system\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.  Changing "
+"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if "
+"using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, "
+"Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu.  It is just a question "
+"of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the "
+"<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you "
+"are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any "
+"modification can prevent your machine from booting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is "
+"installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common "
+"to all operating systems installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set "
+"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. "
+"During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating "
+"systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is made, the "
+"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is "
+"possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and "
+"password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change "
+"settings. The username is \"root\" and the password is the one chosen here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:63
+msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:66
+msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the "
+"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was "
+"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI "
+"compatible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:73
+msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for "
+"multicore processors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual "
+"processor and enable SMP."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</"
+"guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two "
+"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O "
+"APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses "
+"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful "
+"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC "
+"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message "
+"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local "
+"APIC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:97
+msgid "drakboot1.png"
+msgstr "drakboot1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot "
+"loader you chose."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:106
+msgid "You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:108
+msgid ""
+"In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot "
+"time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu "
+"entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item.  If you "
+"click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> "
+"buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or "
+"to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be "
+"able to use these tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:118
+msgid "drakboot2.png"
+msgstr "drakboot2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:122
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want "
+"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For "
+"example: Mageia3."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches "
+"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the "
+"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:133 en/drakboot.xml:160
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to "
+"the kernel at boot time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:136
+msgid ""
+"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this "
+"entry by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:139
+msgid ""
+"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to "
+"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> "
+"file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref linkend="
+"\"draknetprofile\"/>, in the drop-down lists."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in "
+"Legacy mode and UEFI mode):"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> "
+"displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default "
+"one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:156
+msgid "drakboot3.png"
+msgstr "drakboot3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them "
+"to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box "
+"<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:167
+msgid ""
+"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to "
+"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable "
+"Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not "
+"touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:175
+msgid "drakboot6.png"
+msgstr "drakboot6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable "
+"unless chain loaded from another OS."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:184
+msgid ""
+"To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub "
+"Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:190
+msgid "drakboot4.png"
+msgstr "drakboot4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:11
+msgid "Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:12
+msgid "drakbug_report"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and "
+"used on the command line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by "
+"doing <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, "
+"but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be "
+"several GBs large."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing "
+"the unneeded parts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:26
+msgid "This command collects the following information on your system:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:29
+msgid "lspci"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:30
+msgid "pci_devices"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:31
+msgid "dmidecode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:32
+msgid "fdisk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:33
+msgid "scsi"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:34
+msgid "/sys/bus/scsi/devices"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:35
+msgid "lsmod"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:36
+msgid "cmdline"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:37
+msgid "pcmcia: stab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:38
+msgid "usb"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:39
+msgid "partitions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:40
+msgid "cpuinfo"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:41
+msgid "syslog"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:42
+msgid "Xorg.log"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:43
+msgid "monitor_full_edid"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:44
+msgid "stage1.log"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:45
+msgid "ddebug.log"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:46
+msgid "install.log"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:47
+msgid "fstab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:48
+msgid "modprobe.conf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:49
+msgid "lilo.conf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:50
+msgid "grub: menu.lst"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:51
+msgid "grub: install.sh"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:52
+msgid "grub: device.map"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:53
+msgid "xorg.conf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:54
+msgid "urpmi.cfg"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:55
+msgid "modprobe.preload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:56
+msgid "sysconfig/i18n"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:57
+msgid "/proc/iomem"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:58
+msgid "/proc/ioport"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:59
+msgid "mageia version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:60
+msgid "rpm -qa"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:61
+msgid "df"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"At the time this help page was written, the \"syslog\" part of this "
+"command's output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to "
+"our switch to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the \"syslog\" "
+"by doing (as root) <emphasis role=\"bold\"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</"
+"emphasis>. If you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take "
+"the last 5000 lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">journalctl -a | tail -n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:9
+msgid "Mageia Bug Report Tool"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:9
+msgid "drakbug"
+msgstr "drakbug"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:15
+msgid "drakbug.png"
+msgstr "drakbug.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakbug</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Usually, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> starts "
+"automatically when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, "
+"after filing a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of "
+"the information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, "
+"then please read <link xlink:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/"
+"How_to_report_a_bug_properly\">How to report a bug report properly</link> "
+"before clicking on the \"Report\" button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message "
+"that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to "
+"that existing report that you saw the bug, too."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:3
+msgid "Manage date and time"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:5
+msgid "drakclock"
+msgstr "drakclock"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:10
+msgid "drakclock.png"
+msgstr "drakclock.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab "
+"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time"
+"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right "
+"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:21
+msgid "It's a very simple tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. "
+"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on "
+"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue)  and it is a Sunday. Select the month "
+"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or "
+"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</"
+"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by "
+"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time "
+"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's "
+"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, "
+"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows "
+"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see "
+"your desktop environment settings for that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the "
+"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the "
+"nearest town."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they "
+"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation "
+"settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3
+msgid "Remove a connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3
+msgid "drakconnect --del"
+msgstr "drakconnect --del"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:8
+msgid "drakconnect--del.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect--del.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id="
+"\"0\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then "
+"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted "
+"successfully."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:3
+msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:6
+msgid "drakconnect"
+msgstr "drakconnect"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:11
+msgid "drakconnect.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much "
+"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from "
+"your access provider or your network administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware "
+"and provider you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:30
+msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one "
+"to configure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167
+msgid ""
+"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP "
+"address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557
+msgid "Automatic IP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers "
+"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained "
+"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, "
+"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.  "
+"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option "
+"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers "
+"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address "
+"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:62
+msgid "drakconnect5.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572
+msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576
+msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581
+msgid "the DHCP client"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585
+msgid "DHCP timeout"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222
+msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594
+msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599
+msgid ""
+"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server "
+"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. "
+"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection "
+"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615
+msgid "Manual configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS "
+"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no "
+"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is "
+"attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like "
+"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</"
+"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service "
+"provider's website."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</"
+"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is "
+"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", "
+"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need "
+"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need "
+"this setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:136
+msgid "drakconnect30.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect30.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:780
+msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:150
+msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:91
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:95 en/draknetcenter.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:158
+msgid "A new Cable modem connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:172
+msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:176
+msgid "None"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name "
+"and password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:191
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers "
+"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained "
+"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, "
+"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.  "
+"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option "
+"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers "
+"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address "
+"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:252
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers "
+"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME "
+"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is "
+"attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:263
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</"
+"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is "
+"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", "
+"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need "
+"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not "
+"need this setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:273
+msgid "drakconnect32.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect32.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:287
+msgid "A new DSL connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:291
+msgid ""
+"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to "
+"configure it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</"
+"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380
+msgid "Select one of the protocols available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:307
+msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:311
+msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:315
+msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:319
+msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:323
+msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:329
+msgid "Access settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678
+msgid "Account Login (user name)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682
+msgid "Account password"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:341
+msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:345
+msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:357
+msgid "A new ISDN connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706
+msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:365
+msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:369
+msgid "External ISDN modem"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:375
+msgid ""
+"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. "
+"Select your card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:384
+msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:389
+msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:395
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries.  Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</"
+"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is "
+"asked for parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:402
+msgid "Connection name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:406
+msgid "Phone number"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:410
+msgid "Login ID"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:418
+msgid "Authentication method"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:424
+msgid ""
+"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or "
+"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:430
+msgid ""
+"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by "
+"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to "
+"put:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:436
+msgid "Domain name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:440
+msgid "First and second DNS Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:444
+msgid ""
+"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you "
+"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:452
+msgid ""
+"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic "
+"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the "
+"IP address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:464
+msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:468
+msgid ""
+"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for "
+"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure.  Use ndiswrapper "
+"only if the other configuration methods did not work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:475
+msgid ""
+"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that "
+"the card has detected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:480
+msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:484
+msgid "drakconnect31.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect31.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:490
+msgid "Operating mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:494
+msgid "Managed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:497
+msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:503
+msgid "Ad-Hoc"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:506
+msgid "To configure direct connection between computers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:514
+msgid "Network Name (ESSID)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:518
+msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:523
+msgid "WPA/WPA2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:526
+msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:532
+msgid "WEP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:535
+msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:543
+msgid "Encryption key"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:545
+msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:552
+msgid ""
+"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a "
+"manual IP address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:561
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are "
+"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. "
+"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of "
+"the computer can be specified here.  If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name "
+"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be "
+"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from "
+"DHCP server</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:589
+msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:608
+msgid ""
+"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all "
+"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:619
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, "
+"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:625
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like "
+"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</"
+"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers "
+"website."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:630
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</"
+"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the "
+"period."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:644
+msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:648
+msgid ""
+"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to "
+"configure it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:653
+msgid "The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:658
+msgid ""
+"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option "
+"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:670
+msgid "Provide access settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:674
+msgid "Access Point Name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:694
+msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:702
+msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:710
+msgid "Manual choice"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:714
+msgid "Detected hardware, if any."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:720
+msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:724
+msgid ""
+"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package "
+"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:729
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</"
+"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked "
+"for Dialup options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:736
+msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:740
+msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:744
+msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:748
+msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:752
+msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:756
+msgid "PAP/CHAP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:760
+msgid "Script-based"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:764
+msgid "PAP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:768
+msgid "Terminal-based"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:772
+msgid "CHAP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:786
+msgid "Ending the configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:788
+msgid "In the next step, you can specify:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:792
+msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:796
+msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:800
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:804
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:809
+msgid ""
+"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow "
+"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch "
+"automatically between access point according to the signal strength."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:816
+msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:820
+msgid "Metric (10 by default)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:824
+msgid "MTU"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:828
+msgid "Network Hotplugging"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:832
+msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:836
+msgid ""
+"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start "
+"immediately or not."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:841
+msgid "drakconnect9.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect9.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:3
+msgid "Open a console as administrator"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:5
+msgid "drakconsole"
+msgstr "drakconsole"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:10
+msgid "drakconsole.png"
+msgstr "drakconsole.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a "
+"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more "
+"information about that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:5
+msgid "Manage disk partitions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:7
+msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:12
+msgid "drakdiskBackup.png"
+msgstr "drakdiskBackup.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> "
+"as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny "
+"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a "
+"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll "
+"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</"
+"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you "
+"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:32
+msgid "drakdisk.png"
+msgstr "drakdisk.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your "
+"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, "
+"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a "
+"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</"
+"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, "
+"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called \"EFI "
+"System Partition\" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it "
+"contains all your different operating systems bootloaders."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot "
+"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition "
+"must be unmounted first."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:56
+msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to "
+"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button "
+"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part "
+"is selected"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:63
+msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:68
+msgid "drakdiskMountedPartition.png"
+msgstr "drakdiskMountedPartition.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> "
+"gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be "
+"seen in the screenshot below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:78
+msgid "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png"
+msgstr "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:4
+msgid "Set up display manager"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:5
+msgid "drakedm"
+msgstr "drakedm"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:9
+msgid "drakedm.png"
+msgstr "drakedm.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display "
+"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available "
+"on your system will be shown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. "
+"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a "
+"lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3
+msgid "Set up your personal firewall"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5
+msgid "drakfirewall"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:10
+msgid "drakfirewall.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal "
+"firewall\". It is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system "
+"security, permissions and audit\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming "
+"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the "
+"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection "
+"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - "
+"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable "
+"the firewall, and only check the needed services."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on "
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field "
+"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these "
+"examples :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32
+msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34
+msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37
+msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is "
+"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:44
+msgid "drakfirewall2.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) "
+"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even "
+"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature "
+"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box "
+"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second "
+"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure "
+"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards "
+"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot "
+"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be "
+"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64
+msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:69
+msgid "drakfirewall3.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall3.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:75
+msgid "drakfirewall4.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the "
+"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary "
+"packages are downloaded."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network &amp; "
+"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:3
+msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:6
+msgid "drakfont"
+msgstr "drakfont"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:11
+msgid "drakfont.png"
+msgstr "drakfont.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It "
+"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen "
+"above shows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:22
+msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:26
+msgid "a preview of the selected font."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:30
+msgid "some buttons explained here later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:36
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You "
+"must have Microsoft Windows installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:41
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)  able "
+"to use the fonts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:46
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.  Be "
+"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the "
+"documents that use them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:52
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The "
+"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the "
+"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when "
+"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont "
+"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:3
+msgid "Parental Controls"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:5
+msgid "drakguard"
+msgstr "drakguard"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:10
+msgid "drakguard.png"
+msgstr "drakguard.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</"
+"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard "
+"package (not installed by default)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:21 en/msecgui.xml:19
+msgid "Presentation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to "
+"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three "
+"useful capabilities:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by "
+"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can "
+"only execute what you accept them to execute."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/"
+"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To "
+"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker "
+"DansGuardian."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:49
+msgid "Configuring Parental controls"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, "
+"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on "
+"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel "
+"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named "
+"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by "
+"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this "
+"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will "
+"then suggest you reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental "
+"control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab "
+"is opened."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the "
+"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all "
+"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have "
+"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the "
+"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are "
+"not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.  Select an "
+"user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to "
+"remove him/her from the allowed users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed "
+"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and "
+"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time "
+"window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:83
+msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:90
+msgid "Block Programs Tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:92
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to "
+"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the "
+"applications you wish to block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand "
+"side will not be subject to acl blocking."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:9
+msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:12
+msgid "drakgw"
+msgstr "drakgw"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:17
+msgid "drakgw.png"
+msgstr "drakgw.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:25
+msgid "Principles"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:29
+msgid "../drakgw-net.png"
+msgstr "../drakgw-net.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a "
+"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local "
+"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to "
+"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the "
+"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card "
+"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to "
+"the Internet (2)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are "
+"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:45
+msgid "Gateway wizard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps "
+"which are shown below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this "
+"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard "
+"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that "
+"what is proposed is correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes "
+"one, check that this is correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask "
+"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual "
+"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:78
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.  Otherwise, you have to "
+"specify the address of a DNS server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure "
+"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, "
+"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the "
+"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to "
+"printers and to share them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:109
+msgid "Configure the client"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to "
+"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address "
+"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting "
+"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is "
+"using."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular "
+"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the "
+"gateway."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:123
+msgid "Stop connection sharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:125
+msgid ""
+"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch "
+"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:3
+msgid "Hosts definitions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:5
+msgid "drakhosts"
+msgstr "drakhosts"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:10
+msgid "drakhosts.png"
+msgstr "drakhosts.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-"
+"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to "
+"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name "
+"instead of the IP-address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:20
+msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window "
+"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an "
+"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:27
+msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the "
+"same window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3
+msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3
+msgid "drakinvictus"
+msgstr "drakinvictus"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:8
+msgid "drakinvictus.png"
+msgstr "drakinvictus.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:12 en/draknetcenter.xml:127 en/drakups.xml:12
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:8
+msgid "Network Center"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:9
+msgid "draknetcenter"
+msgstr "draknetcenter"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:13
+msgid "draknetcenter.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"Network &amp; Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network "
+"Center\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks "
+"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, "
+"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending "
+"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its "
+"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a "
+"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, "
+"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30
+msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"
+msgstr "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30
+msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"
+msgstr "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31
+msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"
+msgstr "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31
+msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"
+msgstr "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the "
+"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows "
+"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type="
+"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type="
+"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, "
+"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not "
+"connected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected "
+"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</"
+"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the "
+"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either "
+"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or "
+"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to "
+"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window "
+"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in "
+"particular)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:43
+msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:46
+msgid "draknetcenter1.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:51
+msgid "The Monitor button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:54
+msgid "draknetcenter4.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the "
+"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is "
+"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray "
+"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the "
+"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which "
+"gives details about connection status."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</"
+"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:70
+msgid "The Configure button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:71
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:74
+msgid "draknetcenter2.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. "
+"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> "
+"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual "
+"configuration may give better results."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks "
+"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the "
+"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are "
+"available from your providers website."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count "
+"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in "
+"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may "
+"have to reconnect to the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:"
+"</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:94 en/draknetcenter.xml:126
+msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:100
+msgid "draknetcenter5.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:103
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:104
+msgid "Only the items not already seen above are explained."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:107
+msgid "draknetcenter3.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access "
+"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected.  "
+"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as "
+"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:116
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118
+msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know these settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a "
+"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA "
+"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used "
+"in private networks."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access "
+"point while remaining connected to the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:132
+msgid "draknetcenter6.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:137
+msgid "The Advanced Settings button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:143
+msgid "draknetcenter7.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:12
+msgid "Manage different network profiles"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:14 en/draknetprofile.xml:46
+msgid "Draknetprofile"
+msgstr "Draknetprofile"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix "
+"set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a "
+"desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between "
+"various network environments: having the system run in different network "
+"environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given "
+"network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each "
+"time the network environment changes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:31
+msgid "Profiles"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a "
+"standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>\"network profile\"</"
+"emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, defined for "
+"a specific network environment. Each network profile has a <emphasis "
+"role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes out of "
+"system generation has the name <emphasis>\"default\"</emphasis>; when a new "
+"profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all "
+"already existing profile names."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center "
+"(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing profiles. "
+"This GUI allows to"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the "
+"\"current profile\","
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:61
+msgid "create a new, additional profile,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:65
+msgid "delete a profile from the list of defined profiles."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:73
+msgid "Running Draknetprofile"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:76
+msgid "Defining profiles, profile switching"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:78
+msgid ""
+"Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its "
+"users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, "
+"launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:86
+msgid "./draknetprofile_mcc.png"
+msgstr "./draknetprofile_mcc.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network &amp; "
+"Internet tab</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:103
+msgid "select the \"Network &amp; Internet\" tab,"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"hit \"Manage different network profiles\" in the \"Personalize and Secure "
+"your network\" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a "
+"terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when standard-"
+"output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - for "
+"instance for debugging). Simply type:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:124
+msgid "<literal>&#x2002;draknetprofile&#x2002;</literal>"
+msgstr "<literal>&#x2002;draknetprofile&#x2002;</literal>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:130
+msgid "After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:136
+msgid "./draknetprofile_main.png"
+msgstr "./draknetprofile_main.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of Draknetprofile</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:145
+msgid ""
+"The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently "
+"defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:152
+msgid ""
+"\"Activate\" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as "
+"the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:158
+msgid "\"New\" ... create a new profile;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"\"Delete\" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:167
+msgid "\"Quit\" ... exit from Draknetprofile."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:171
+msgid ""
+"Before hitting the \"Activate\" or the \"Delete\" button, you have to select "
+"a profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the "
+"target profile."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:175
+msgid ""
+"Hitting the \"New\" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can "
+"type the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different "
+"from any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise "
+"copy of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the "
+"current profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties "
+"(modify the automatically created configuration) in a second, independent "
+"action:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:188
+msgid "exit from Draknetprofile (hit the \"Quit\" button),"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:192
+msgid ""
+"back in the \"Network &amp; Internet\" tab, you select the tab \"Set up a "
+"new network interface (...)\" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1),"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:198
+msgid ""
+"you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are "
+"similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during "
+"system generation - as documented in the <link linkend='drakconnect-"
+"ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:206
+msgid ""
+"The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the \"Advanced\" "
+"button to make it visible. It should display the list of names of "
+"Draknetprofile <emphasis role='bold'>\"modules\"</emphasis> (such as "
+"\"network\", \"firewall\", \"urpmi\"), each with a check-button next to the "
+"name; these check-buttons determine whether the properties controlled by "
+"that module are included into the profile or not."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:217
+msgid "Using a system that has more than one profile"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:219
+msgid ""
+"In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user "
+"interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the "
+"bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you "
+"will get a message like"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:230
+msgid ""
+"<literal>&#x2002;Select network profile: (1) default (2) roaming*&#x2002;</"
+"literal>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:237
+msgid ""
+"Type 1 or 2 to select the \"default\", respectively the \"roaming\" profile, "
+"or carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk "
+"(the profile that was active when the system had been shut down)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:242
+msgid ""
+"Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens "
+"that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a "
+"profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot.  This "
+"problem is under investigation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:251
+msgid "Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:253
+msgid ""
+"The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory "
+"<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names "
+"like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:257
+msgid ""
+"The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file "
+"<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:9
+msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:11
+msgid "draknfs"
+msgstr "draknfs"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:16
+msgid "draknfs.png"
+msgstr "draknfs.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:24
+msgid "Prerequisites"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the "
+"first time, it may display the following message:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:33
+msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:42
+msgid "Main window"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list "
+"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a "
+"configuration tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:50
+msgid "Modify entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched "
+"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are "
+"available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:58
+msgid "draknfs4.png"
+msgstr "draknfs4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:64
+msgid "NFS Directory"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The "
+"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose "
+"it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:72
+msgid "Host access"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared "
+"directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:77
+msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name "
+"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard "
+"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the "
+"domain cs.foo.edu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all "
+"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either "
+"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:96
+msgid "User ID Mapping"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid "
+"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client "
+"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on "
+"the server itself."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. "
+"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids "
+"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP "
+"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID "
+"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of "
+"the anonymous account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:118
+msgid "Advanced options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests "
+"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).  This option "
+"is on by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read "
+"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any "
+"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by "
+"using this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from "
+"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made "
+"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can "
+"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See "
+"exports(5) man page for more details."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:176
+msgid "Menu entries"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:143
+msgid "So far the list has at least one entry."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:147
+msgid "draknfs5.png"
+msgstr "draknfs5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:182
+msgid "File|Write conf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:155
+msgid "Save the current configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:159
+msgid "NFS Server|Restart"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:166
+msgid "NFS Server|Reload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:204
+msgid ""
+"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:10
+msgid "Proxy"
+msgstr "Proxy"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:12
+msgid "drakproxy"
+msgstr "drakproxy"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:17
+msgid "drakproxy.png"
+msgstr "drakproxy.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use "
+"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net "
+"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify "
+"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a "
+"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts as "
+"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other "
+"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, "
+"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a "
+"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to "
+"simplify and control their complexity."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3
+msgid "Configure Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5
+msgid "drakrpm-edit-media"
+msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17
+msgid "drakrpm-edit-media.png"
+msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as "
+"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources "
+"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button "
+"below)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a "
+"USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media "
+"used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new "
+"packages, you should disable (or delete) this media.  (It will have the "
+"media type CD-Rom)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called "
+"i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether "
+"your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They "
+"don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both "
+"the i586 and the x86_64 media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" "
+"id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:46
+msgid "The columns"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:48
+msgid "Column Enable:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with "
+"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:54
+msgid "Column Update:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only "
+"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, "
+"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root "
+"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62
+msgid "Column medium:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release "
+"versions contain at least:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs "
+"available supported by Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs "
+"which are not free"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there "
+"might be patent claims in some countries."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:82
+msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the "
+"this version of Mageia was released."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since "
+"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium "
+"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions "
+"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests "
+"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the "
+"corrections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111
+msgid "The buttons on the right"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114
+msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to "
+"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example)  since "
+"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:121
+msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and "
+"proxy)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:126
+msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories "
+"contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the \"Add\" button "
+"adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that "
+"you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a "
+"specific mirror, then add it by choosing \"Add a specific media mirror\" "
+"from the drop-down \"File\" menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135
+msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list "
+"in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same "
+"release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will "
+"be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:145 en/harddrake2.xml:64
+msgid "The menu"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:147
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and "
+"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:152
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:154
+msgid ""
+"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's "
+"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the "
+"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. "
+"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose "
+"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the "
+"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by "
+"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165
+msgid "drakrpmEditMedia2.png"
+msgstr "drakrpmEditMedia2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:169
+msgid ""
+"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very "
+"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available "
+"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:174
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:176
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that "
+"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:181
+msgid "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"
+msgstr "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a "
+"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, "
+"according to the medium type)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:187
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189
+msgid ""
+"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed"
+"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to "
+"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by "
+"default-, update only, always or never)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:194
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:196
+msgid ""
+"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate "
+"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the "
+"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</"
+"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on "
+"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:203
+msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:204
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:206
+msgid ""
+"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it "
+"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if "
+"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:213
+msgid ""
+"For more information about configuring the media, see <link ns2:href="
+"\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management\">the Mageia Wiki page</"
+"link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:3
+msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:6
+msgid "draksambashare"
+msgstr "draksambashare"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:11
+msgid "draksambashare.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some "
+"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure "
+"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is "
+"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the "
+"resources of the Samba server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:28
+msgid "Preparation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP "
+"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with "
+"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies "
+"the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The "
+"firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:41
+msgid "Wizard - Standalone server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks "
+"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are "
+"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:52
+msgid "draksambashare0.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare0.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already "
+"selected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:60
+msgid "draksambashare1.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the "
+"access to the shared resources."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on "
+"the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:72
+msgid "draksambashare2.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:76
+msgid "Choose the security mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the "
+"resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for "
+"each share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP "
+"address or host name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:95
+msgid "draksambashare3.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be "
+"described in the Windows workstations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:104
+msgid "draksambashare4.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:108
+msgid ""
+"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:113
+msgid "draksambashare5.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the "
+"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/"
+"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:123
+msgid "draksambashare6.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:129
+msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:133
+msgid "draksambashare13.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare13.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain "
+"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is "
+"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are "
+"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the "
+"security mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:142
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and "
+"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.  The centralized "
+"account repository is shared between (security)  controllers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:151
+msgid "Declare a directory to share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:153
+msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:157
+msgid "draksambashare15.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare15.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:161
+msgid ""
+"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</"
+"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is "
+"visible to the public, writable or browseable.  The share name can not be "
+"modified."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:168
+msgid "draksambashare16.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare16.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:178
+msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:184
+msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:189
+msgid "Samba server|Configure"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:191
+msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:195
+msgid "Samba server|Restart"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:202
+msgid "Samba Server|Reload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:210
+msgid "Printers share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:212
+msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:216
+msgid "draksambashare17.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare17.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:214 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:58 en/rpmdrake.xml:163 en/rpmdrake.xml:173
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 en/rpmdrake.xml:193 en/rpmdrake.xml:203
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:238
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:222
+msgid "Samba users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:227
+msgid "draksambashare18.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare18.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:224
+msgid ""
+"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared "
+"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref "
+"linkend=\"userdrake\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksec.xml:3
+msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksec.xml:6
+msgid "draksec"
+msgstr "draksec"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksec.xml:11
+msgid "draksec0.png"
+msgstr "draksec0.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks "
+"usually done by the administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:22
+msgid "Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksec.xml:27
+msgid "draksec.png"
+msgstr "draksec.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in "
+"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a "
+"drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the "
+"same MCC tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:43
+msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:53
+msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:11
+msgid "Snapshots"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12
+msgid "draksnapshot-config"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:18
+msgid "draksnapshot-config.png"
+msgstr "draksnapshot-config.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is available in MCC's "
+"<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration tools</"
+"guilabel> section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message "
+"about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to "
+"proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the "
+"<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable Backups</"
+"guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, <guilabel>Backup the "
+"whole system</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose "
+"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to "
+"the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and "
+"files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the <guilabel>Exclude</"
+"guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from the chosen "
+"directories, that should <emphasis role=\"bold\">not</emphasis> be included "
+"in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are done."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the "
+"<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted "
+"USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis role=\"bold\">/run/media/"
+"your_user_name/</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:45
+msgid "Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksound.xml:3
+msgid "Sound Configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksound.xml:4
+msgid "draksound"
+msgstr "draksound"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksound.xml:8
+msgid "draksound.png"
+msgstr "draksound.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:11 en/mousedrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and "
+"troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you "
+"change the sound card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound "
+"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting "
+"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio "
+"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it "
+"enabled."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It "
+"is also recommended to leave it enabled."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with "
+"fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this "
+"before asking the community for help."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an "
+"obvious button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksound.xml:30
+msgid "draksound1.png"
+msgstr "draksound1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakups.xml:3
+msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakups.xml:3
+msgid "drakups"
+msgstr "drakups"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakups.xml:8
+msgid "drakups.png"
+msgstr "drakups.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:3
+msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:6
+msgid "drakvpn"
+msgstr "drakvpn"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:11
+msgid "drakvpn1.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure "
+"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local "
+"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the "
+"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is "
+"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the "
+"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:30
+msgid "Configuration"
+msgstr "Configuración"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which "
+"protocol is used for your virtual private network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:35
+msgid "Then give your connection a name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:37
+msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:42
+msgid "For Cisco VPN"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:48
+msgid "drakvpn3.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the "
+"first time the tool is used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:59
+msgid "drakvpn7.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you "
+"received from the network administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:64
+msgid "Advanced parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:68
+msgid "drakvpn8.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn8.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:72
+msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN "
+"connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network "
+"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect "
+"to this VPN."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3
+msgid "Configure webserver"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard apache2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_apache2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_apache2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a "
+"web server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:15
+msgid "What is a web server?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be "
+"accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:21
+msgid "Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:23
+msgid "Welcome to the web server wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:30
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:34 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:49
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:34 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:38 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:38
+msgid "Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:41
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad "
+"things."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:49
+msgid "Server User Module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:52
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step3.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:56
+msgid "Allows users to create their own sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:60
+msgid "User web directory name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:63
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step4.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will "
+"display it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:71
+msgid "Server Document Root"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:74
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step5.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:78
+msgid "Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:82 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:83
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:71 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:144
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:105
+msgid "Summary"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:85
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step6.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:89 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:91
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:78 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:153
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"Take a second to check these options, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:93 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:82
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:173 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:116
+msgid "Finish"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:96
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step7.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-web-step7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:100 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:89
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:183 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:123
+msgid "You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3
+msgid "Configure DNS"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard bind"
+msgstr "drakwizard bind"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_bind.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_bind.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3
+msgid "Configure DHCP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:5
+msgid "drakwizard dhcp"
+msgstr "drakwizard dhcp"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:10
+msgid "drakwizard_dhcp.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_dhcp.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net "
+"interfaces"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a "
+"<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should "
+"be installed before you can access to it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:26
+msgid "What is DHCP?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a "
+"standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically "
+"configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet "
+"communication. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:35
+msgid "Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:37
+msgid "Welcome to the DHCP server wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:45
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:54
+msgid "Selecting Adaptor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:58
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for "
+"which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:68
+msgid "Select IP range"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:72
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want "
+"the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to "
+"some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then "
+"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:87
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:96
+msgid "Hold on..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:100
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and "
+"change things around."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:109
+msgid "Hours later..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:113
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:121 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:87
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:189
+msgid "What is done"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:125
+msgid "Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from <code>/usr/share/"
+"wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and adding the new "
+"parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:140
+msgid "<code>hname</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:144
+msgid "<code>dns</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:148
+msgid "net"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:152
+msgid "ip"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:156
+msgid "<code>mask</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:160
+msgid "<code>rng1</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:164
+msgid "<code>rng2</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:168
+msgid "<code>dname</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:172
+msgid "<code>gateway</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:176
+msgid "<code>tftpserverip</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:180
+msgid "<code>dhcpd_interface</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:186
+msgid ""
+"Also modifying Webmin configuration file <code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</"
+"code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:191
+msgid "Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:10
+msgid "Configure time"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12
+msgid "drakwizard ntp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:19
+msgid "drakwizard_ntp.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_ntp.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> purpose is to set the "
+"time of your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed "
+"by default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base "
+"packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:32
+msgid "Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three "
+"time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice "
+"because this server always points to available time servers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:43
+msgid "drakwizard-ntp1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ntp1.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:49
+msgid "drakwizard-ntp2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ntp2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata><info>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:51
+msgid "<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:50
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you "
+"arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it "
+"using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button.  If everything is right, "
+"click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It "
+"may take a while and you finally get this screen below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:72
+msgid "drakwizard-ntp3.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ntp3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:78
+msgid "Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:89
+msgid "This tool executes the following steps:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:93
+msgid "Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to <code>/etc/sysconfig/"
+"clock.orig</code> and <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to <code>/etc/ntp/"
+"step-tickers.orig</code>;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of "
+"servers;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server "
+"name;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and <code>ntpd</"
+"code> services;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3
+msgid "Configure FTP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard proftpd"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_proftpd.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_proftpd.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an "
+"<acronym>FTP</acronym> server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:15
+msgid "What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network "
+"protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a "
+"<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:21
+msgid "Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:23
+msgid "Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:30
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:41
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad "
+"things."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:49
+msgid "Server Information"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:52
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email "
+"complaints too and whether to allow root login access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:60
+msgid "Server Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:63
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> "
+"(File eXchange Protocol)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:74
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:85
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:10
+msgid "Configure proxy"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12
+msgid "drakwizard squid"
+msgstr "drakwizard squid"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:17
+msgid "drakwizard_squid.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_squid.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a "
+"proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed "
+"before you can access to it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:29
+msgid "What is a proxy server?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts "
+"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other "
+"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, "
+"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a "
+"different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to "
+"simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:40
+msgid "Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:42
+msgid "Welcome to the proxy server wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:50
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:60
+msgid "Selecting the proxy port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:64
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:74
+msgid "Set Memory and Disk Usage"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:78
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:88
+msgid "Select Network Access Control"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:92
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"Set visibility to local network or world, then click <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:102
+msgid "Grant Network Access"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:106
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:111
+msgid "Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:116
+msgid "Use Upper Level Proxy Server?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:120
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:125
+msgid "Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:130
+msgid "Upper Level Proxy URL and Port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:134
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:139
+msgid ""
+"Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:148
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:158
+msgid "Start during boot?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:162
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:168
+msgid ""
+"Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then "
+"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:177
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:193
+msgid "Installing the package squid if needed;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf."
+"orig;</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:202
+msgid ""
+"Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from <code>squid.conf."
+"default</code> and adding the new parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:208
+msgid "<code>cache_dir</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:212
+msgid "<code>localnet</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:216
+msgid "cache_mem"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:220
+msgid "http_port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:224
+msgid ""
+"<code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:229
+msgid "<code>cache_peer</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:233
+msgid "<code>visible_hostname</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:239
+msgid "Restarting <code>squid.</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3
+msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard sshd"
+msgstr "drakwizard sshd"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_sshd.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_sshd.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an "
+"<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16
+msgid "What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data "
+"communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and "
+"other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, "
+"via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client "
+"(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, "
+"respectively). (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:22
+msgid "Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:24
+msgid "Welcome to the Open SSH wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:28
+msgid "Select Type of Configure Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:31
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or <guilabel>Newbie</"
+"guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:39
+msgid "General Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:42
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard "
+"<acronym>SSH</acronym> port."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:50
+msgid "Authentication Methods"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:53
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, "
+"then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:61
+msgid "Logging"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:64
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"Choose logging facility and level of output, then click <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:72
+msgid "Login Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:75
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:79
+msgid "Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:83
+msgid "User Login Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:86
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:94
+msgid "Compression and Forwarding"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:97
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:108
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:119
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:3
+msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:4
+msgid "drakxservices"
+msgstr "drakxservices"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:8
+msgid "drakxservices.png"
+msgstr "drakxservices.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:10
+msgid "Hardware configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:12
+msgid "harddrake2"
+msgstr "harddrake2"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:17
+msgid "harddrake2.png"
+msgstr "harddrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of "
+"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job "
+"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command "
+"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-"
+"lst</code> package."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:31
+msgid "The window"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:33
+msgid "The window is divided in two columns."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are "
+"grouped by categories. Click on the &gt; to expand the content of a "
+"category. Each device can be selected in this column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The right column displays information about the selected device.  The "
+"<guimenu>Help -&gt; Fields description</guimenu> gives some information "
+"about the content of the fields."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are "
+"available at the bottom of the right column:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to "
+"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must "
+"used by experts only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can "
+"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to "
+"enable automatic detection:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:73
+msgid "modem"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:77
+msgid "Jaz devices"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:81
+msgid "Zip parallel devices"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check "
+"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will "
+"be operational the next time this tool is started."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7
+msgid "keyboarddrake"
+msgstr "keyboarddrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:12
+msgid "keyboarddrake.png"
+msgstr "keyboarddrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you "
+"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. "
+"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found "
+"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "
+"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29
+msgid "Keyboard Layout"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed "
+"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each "
+"layout should be used for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37
+msgid "Keyboard Type"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are "
+"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:10
+msgid "Manage localization for your system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:13
+msgid "localedrake"
+msgstr "localedrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:18
+msgid "localedrake.png"
+msgstr "localedrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the "
+"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage "
+"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can "
+"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate "
+"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected "
+"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to "
+"countries not listed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:38
+msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:42
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input "
+"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, "
+"Korean, etc)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so "
+"users should not need to configure it manually."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions "
+"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another "
+"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:3
+msgid "View and search system logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:5
+msgid "logdrake"
+msgstr "logdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:10
+msgid "logdrake.png"
+msgstr "logdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</"
+"guilabel>\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:22
+msgid "To do a search in the logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do "
+"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)  to search in "
+"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to "
+"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month "
+"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>"
+"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the "
+"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is "
+"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia "
+"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.  These logs are "
+"updated each time a configuration is modified."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:43
+msgid "To configure a mail alert"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and "
+"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured "
+"address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</"
+"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure "
+"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running "
+"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. "
+"(See screenshot above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:55
+msgid "The following services can be watched :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:59
+msgid "Webmin Service"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:63
+msgid "Postfix Mail Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:67
+msgid "FTP Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:71
+msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:75
+msgid "SSH Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:79
+msgid "Samba Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:83
+msgid "Xinetd Service"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:87
+msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:91
+msgid "logdrake1.png"
+msgstr "logdrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider "
+"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows "
+"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone "
+"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value "
+"to 3 times the number of processors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the "
+"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local "
+"or on the Internet)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:10
+msgid "Display Available NFS And SMB Shares"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:11
+msgid "lsnetdrake"
+msgstr "lsnetdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">lsnetdrake</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and "
+"used on the command line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/Documentation_team\"> the Documentation team.</link> Thanking you in "
+"advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:3
+msgid "Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:6
+msgid "lspcidrake"
+msgstr "lspcidrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">lspcidrake</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and "
+"used on the command line. It will give some more information if used under "
+"root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, "
+"PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst "
+"packages to work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:20
+msgid "lspcidrake1.png"
+msgstr "lspcidrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it "
+"is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:31
+msgid "Information about the graphic card;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:33
+msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:35
+msgid "Information about the network"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:37
+msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:39
+msgid "-i to ignore case distinctions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for "
+"lspcidrake and the -i option for grep."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:46
+msgid "lspcidrake2.png"
+msgstr "lspcidrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is "
+"called <emphasis role=\"bold\">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3
+msgid "Software Packages Update"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5
+msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update"
+msgstr "MageiaUpdate o drakrpm-update"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:10
+msgid "MageiaUpdate.png"
+msgstr "MageiaUpdate.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</"
+"emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with drakrpm-"
+"editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are "
+"prompted to do so."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists "
+"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by "
+"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the "
+"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of "
+"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title "
+"means you can click to drop down a text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:38 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:21
+msgid "MageiaUpdate1.png"
+msgstr "MageiaUpdate1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by "
+"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/"
+"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5
+msgid "Boot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:10
+msgid "mcc-boot.png"
+msgstr "mcc-boot.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot "
+"steps. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19
+msgid "Configure boot steps"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/MCC-cover.xml:12 en/MCC.xml:4
+msgid "Mageia Control Center"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC-cover.xml:14
+msgid "The tools to configure the Mageia system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/MCC-cover.xml:17
+msgid "../mageia-2013.png"
+msgstr "../mageia-2013.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC-cover.xml:21 en/MCC.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC-cover.xml:24 en/MCC.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC-cover.xml:26 en/MCC.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4
+msgid "Hardware"
+msgstr "Hardware"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-hardware.png"
+msgstr "mcc-hardware.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your "
+"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20
+msgid "Manage your hardware"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34
+msgid "Configure graphics"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48
+msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61
+msgid "Configure printing and scanning"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), "
+"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58
+msgid "Others"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3
+msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to "
+"choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was "
+"installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be "
+"selected in the big right panel."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in "
+"any of the MCC tabs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool "
+"screens."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on "
+"the \"Search\" tab in the left column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17
+msgid "Local disks"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:11
+msgid "mcc-localdisks.png"
+msgstr "mcc-localdisks.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your "
+"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17
+msgid "Network Services"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-networkservices.png"
+msgstr "mcc-networkservices.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if "
+"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose "
+"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or "
+"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4
+msgid "Network Sharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-networksharing.png"
+msgstr "mcc-networksharing.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and "
+"directories. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17
+msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and "
+"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22
+msgid "Configure NFS shares"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27
+msgid "Configure WebDAV shares"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:3
+msgid "Network and Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:8
+msgid "mcc-network.png"
+msgstr "mcc-network.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link "
+"below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:18
+msgid "Manage your network devices"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:36
+msgid "Personalize and Secure your network"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:39
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:43
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:47
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:51
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:61
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Seguranza"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:10
+msgid "mcc-security.png"
+msgstr "mcc-security.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a "
+"link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, "
+"permissions and audit</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:33
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:37
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17
+msgid "Sharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-sharing.png"
+msgstr "mcc-sharing.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only "
+"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can "
+"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link "
+"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:3
+msgid "System"
+msgstr "Sistema"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:7
+msgid "mcc-system.png"
+msgstr "mcc-system.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration "
+"tools. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:14
+msgid "Manage system services"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:16
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:22
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:28
+msgid "Localization"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:30
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:33
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:39
+msgid "Administration tools"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:41
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:44
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:50
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3
+msgid "Configure updates frequency"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5
+msgid "mgaapplet-config"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:10
+msgid "mgaapplet-config.png"
+msgstr "mgaapplet-config.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</"
+"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates "
+"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject"
+"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for "
+"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.  The "
+"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:6
+msgid "mousedrake"
+msgstr "mousedrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:11
+msgid "mousedrake.png"
+msgstr "mousedrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by "
+"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse "
+"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any "
+"PS/2 &amp; USB mice\" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is "
+"immediately taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:3
+msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:5
+msgid "msecgui"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:13
+msgid "msecgui.png"
+msgstr "msecgui.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"msecgui<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is a graphic user interface "
+"for msec that allows to configure your system security according to two "
+"approaches:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to "
+"make it more secure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn "
+"you if something seems dangerous."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"msec uses the concept of \"security levels\" which are intended to configure "
+"a set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or "
+"enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your "
+"own customised security levels."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:45
+msgid "Overview tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:47
+msgid "See the screenshot above"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a "
+"button on the right side to configure them:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:59
+msgid "Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:64
+msgid "msec itself with some information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:68
+msgid "enabled or not"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:72
+msgid "the configured Base security level"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report "
+"and another button to execute the checks just now."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:86
+msgid "Security settings tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:88
+msgid ""
+"A click on the second tab or on the Security <guibutton>Configure</"
+"guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:94
+msgid "msecgui2.png"
+msgstr "msecgui2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:100
+msgid "Basic security tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:103
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security levels:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab "
+"allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then "
+"in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The "
+"following levels are available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you "
+"do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on "
+"your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or "
+"constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only "
+"if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system "
+"vulnerable to attack."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:122
+msgid ""
+"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">standard</emphasis>. This is the default "
+"configuration when installed and is intended for casual users.  It "
+"constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which "
+"detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory "
+"permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec "
+"versions)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when "
+"you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable.  It further restricts "
+"system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to "
+"the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and "
+"5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, "
+"such as the <emphasis role=\"bold\">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"bold\">netbook</emphasis> "
+"levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure system security according to "
+"the most common use cases."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"The last two levels called <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_daily </emphasis> "
+"and <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security "
+"levels but rather tools for periodic checks only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:156
+msgid ""
+"These levels are saved in <filename>/etc/security/msec/level.&lt;levelname></"
+"filename>. You can define your own customised security levels, saving them "
+"into specific files called <filename>level.&lt;levelname></filename>, placed "
+"into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is "
+"intended for power users which require a customised or more secure system "
+"configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:165
+msgid ""
+"Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default "
+"level settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:170
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security alerts:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:173
+msgid ""
+"If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email to:</"
+"guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent by "
+"local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You "
+"can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail "
+"and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive "
+"the security alerts directly on your desktop.  Check the relevant box to "
+"enable it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:182
+msgid ""
+"It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to "
+"immediately inform the security administrator of possible security problems. "
+"If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs files "
+"available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:188
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security options:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer "
+"security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change "
+"any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in <filename>/"
+"etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains the current "
+"security level name and the list of all the modifications done to the "
+"options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:199
+msgid "System security tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:201
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a "
+"description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side "
+"column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:207
+msgid "msecgui3.png"
+msgstr "msecgui3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:211
+msgid ""
+"To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see "
+"screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the "
+"actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be "
+"selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:219
+msgid "msecgui11.png"
+msgstr "msecgui11.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:224
+msgid ""
+"Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration "
+"using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you "
+"have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before "
+"saving them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:232
+msgid "msecgui10.png"
+msgstr "msecgui10.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:238
+msgid "Network security"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:240
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:245
+msgid "msecgui4.png"
+msgstr "msecgui4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:251
+msgid "Periodic checks tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:253
+msgid ""
+"Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of "
+"security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:257
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency "
+"if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is "
+"checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:264
+msgid "msecgui5.png"
+msgstr "msecgui5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:270
+msgid "Exceptions tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:272
+msgid ""
+"Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In "
+"these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab "
+"allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert "
+"messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot "
+"below shows four exceptions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:280
+msgid "msecgui6.png"
+msgstr "msecgui6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:284
+msgid ""
+"To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:289
+msgid "msecgui7.png"
+msgstr "msecgui7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:293
+msgid ""
+"Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called "
+"<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the <guilabel>Exception</"
+"guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is obviously not definitive, "
+"you can either delete it using the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of "
+"the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> tab or modify it with a double clicK."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:303
+msgid "Permissions"
+msgstr "Permisos"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:304
+msgid ""
+"This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and "
+"enforcement."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:306
+msgid ""
+"Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, "
+"secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security level. "
+"You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them into "
+"specific files called <filename>perm.&lt;levelname> </filename> placed into "
+"the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is "
+"intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is "
+"also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission "
+"you want. Current configuration is stored in <filename>/etc/security/msec/"
+"perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the list of all the modifications "
+"done to the permissions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:318
+msgid "msecgui8.png"
+msgstr "msecgui8.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:321
+msgid ""
+"Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You "
+"can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the "
+"owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a "
+"given rule:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:327
+msgid ""
+"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the "
+"defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message "
+"if not, but does not change anything."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:333
+msgid ""
+"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the "
+"permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the "
+"permissions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:337
+msgid ""
+"For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:339
+msgid ""
+"To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button "
+"and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in "
+"the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:345
+msgid "msecgui9.png"
+msgstr "msecgui9.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:348
+msgid ""
+"Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do "
+"not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the "
+"menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed "
+"the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:353
+msgid ""
+"It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the "
+"configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:356
+msgid ""
+"Changes in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permission tab</emphasis> (or "
+"directly in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first "
+"periodic check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold"
+"\">Periodic checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately "
+"into account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You "
+"can use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will "
+"be changed by msecperms."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:363
+msgid ""
+"Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file "
+"manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked "
+"in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will "
+"write the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the "
+"configuration of the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:4
+msgid "Other Mageia Tools"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia "
+"Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the "
+"next pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:11
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:16
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug_report\"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"lsnetdrake\"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:29
+msgid "And more tools?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3
+msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6
+msgid "rpmdrake"
+msgstr "rpmdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:11
+msgid "rpmdrake.png"
+msgstr "rpmdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18
+msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, "
+"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the "
+"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online "
+"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official "
+"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages "
+"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only "
+"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by "
+"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed "
+"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries "
+"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names "
+"included in the packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend="
+"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><important><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43
+msgid "rpmdrake8.png"
+msgstr "rpmdrake8.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for "
+"the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake "
+"will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up "
+"window : <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the above message "
+"annoys you and you have a good internet connection without too strict "
+"download limit, it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online "
+"repositories thanks to <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more "
+"packages, and allow to update your installed packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:55
+msgid "The main parts of the screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:60
+msgid "rpmdrake1.png"
+msgstr "rpmdrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:67
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first "
+"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical "
+"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their "
+"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, "
+"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who "
+"probably do not want command line or specialist tools.  Since you're reading "
+"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge "
+"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </"
+"firstterm>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the "
+"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and "
+"not installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their "
+"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included "
+"in the packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:103
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword "
+"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and "
+"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" "
+"box ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:118
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and "
+"sub categories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:125
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:127
+msgid ""
+"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete "
+"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It "
+"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the "
+"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:137
+msgid "The status column"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139
+msgid ""
+"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by "
+"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A "
+"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium "
+"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is "
+"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or "
+"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</"
+"guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:155
+msgid "Icon"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:157
+msgid "Legend"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:165
+msgid "../rpmdrake2.png"
+msgstr "../rpmdrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:169
+msgid "This package is already installed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:175
+msgid "../rpmdrake3.png"
+msgstr "../rpmdrake3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:179
+msgid "This package will be installed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:185
+msgid "../rpmdrake4.png"
+msgstr "../rpmdrake4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:189
+msgid "This package cannot be modified"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:195
+msgid "../rpmdrake5.png"
+msgstr "../rpmdrake5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199
+msgid "This package is an update"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:205
+msgid "../rpmdrake6.png"
+msgstr "../rpmdrake6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:209
+msgid "This package will be uninstalled"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:147
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:215
+msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219
+msgid ""
+"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status "
+"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking "
+"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:227
+msgid ""
+"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange "
+"with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when "
+"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:235
+msgid "The dependencies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:240
+msgid "rpmdrake7.png"
+msgstr "rpmdrake7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:245
+msgid ""
+"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They "
+"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an "
+"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected "
+"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It "
+"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed "
+"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a "
+"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to "
+"install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10
+msgid "Set up scanner"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11
+msgid "scannerdrake"
+msgstr "scannerdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18
+msgid "Installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing "
+"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure "
+"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. "
+"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a "
+"remote computer or to access remote scanners."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following "
+"message:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35
+msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-"
+"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:44
+msgid "scannerdrake.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see "
+"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, "
+"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner "
+"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend="
+"\"scannersharing\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its "
+"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new "
+"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a "
+"scanner manually</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the "
+"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:69
+msgid "scannerdrake2.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href="
+"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported "
+"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums."
+"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87
+msgid "Choose port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:91
+msgid "scannerdrake3.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id="
+"\"1\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</"
+"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, "
+"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen "
+"similar to the one below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend="
+"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:108
+msgid "scannerdrake4.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117
+msgid "Scannersharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:122
+msgid "scannerdrake5.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be "
+"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also "
+"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on "
+"this machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or "
+"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on "
+"this computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted "
+"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:143
+msgid "scannerdrake6.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149
+msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:153
+msgid "scannerdrake7.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159
+msgid ""
+"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote "
+"machines."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:164
+msgid "scannerdrake8.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake8.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170
+msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:175
+msgid "scannerdrake9.png"
+msgstr "scannerdrake9.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181
+msgid ""
+"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool "
+"offers to do it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184
+msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186
+msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188
+msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive "
+"\"net\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193
+msgid ""
+"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</"
+"emphasis> to be started on boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278
+msgid "Specifics"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205
+msgid "Hewlett-Packard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207
+msgid ""
+"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> "
+"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow "
+"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</"
+"emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214
+msgid "Epson"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/"
+"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must "
+"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then "
+"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the "
+"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict "
+"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be "
+"ignored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231
+msgid "Extra installation steps"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref "
+"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra "
+"steps to correctly configure your scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239
+msgid ""
+"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded "
+"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, "
+"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the "
+"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you "
+"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at "
+"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246
+msgid ""
+"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"
+"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250
+msgid ""
+"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know "
+"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://"
+"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15
+msgid "Software Management"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/software-management.xml:10
+msgid "software-management.png"
+msgstr "software-management.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. "
+"Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:17
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media "
+"sources for install and update</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8
+msgid "Install and configure a printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11
+msgid "system-config-printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:16
+msgid "system-config-printer.png"
+msgstr "system-config-printer.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link "
+"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration "
+"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia "
+"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer "
+"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu "
+"and openSUSE."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the "
+"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-"
+"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> "
+"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure "
+"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/"
+">."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42
+msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45
+msgid "task-printing-server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47
+msgid "task-printing-hp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of "
+"dependencies are needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to "
+"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a "
+"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a "
+"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line.  The window "
+"will also attempt to configure a network printer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61
+msgid "Automatically detected printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the "
+"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next"
+"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be "
+"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known "
+"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the "
+"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72
+msgid "No automatically detected printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:76
+msgid "printer3.png"
+msgstr "printer3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window "
+"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following "
+"options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86
+msgid "Select printer from database"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92
+msgid "provide PPD file"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98
+msgid "search for a driver to download"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer "
+"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one "
+"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have "
+"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one "
+"which know to work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110
+msgid "Complete the installation process"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will "
+"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is "
+"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of "
+"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After "
+"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available "
+"printers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121
+msgid "Network printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or "
+"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to "
+"another workstation that serves as printserver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed "
+"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same "
+"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed "
+"one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or "
+"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a "
+"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label "
+"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a "
+"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it "
+"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters "
+"after \"HWaddr\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142
+msgid ""
+"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to "
+"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, "
+"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find "
+"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu "
+"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it "
+"says \"host\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a "
+"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the "
+"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154
+msgid ""
+"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find "
+"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160
+msgid "Network printing protocols"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as "
+"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network "
+"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is "
+"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers "
+"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-"
+"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can "
+"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/"
+"net/&lt;name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is "
+"not required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172
+msgid ""
+"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the "
+"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change "
+"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be "
+"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is "
+"the same as above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:180
+msgid "printer5.png"
+msgstr "printer5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184
+msgid "The other protocols are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can "
+"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer "
+"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by "
+"some ADSL-routers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, "
+"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol.  The port has to be "
+"defined. By default, the port 631 is used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but "
+"with TLS secured protocol."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be "
+"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer "
+"connected to a station using LPD."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a "
+"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226
+msgid ""
+"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form "
+"the URI:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231
+msgid "Appsocket"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233
+msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237
+msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239
+msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241
+msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245
+msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247
+msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251
+msgid ""
+"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups."
+"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256
+msgid "Device Properties"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258
+msgid ""
+"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to "
+"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your "
+"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</"
+"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which "
+"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, "
+"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268
+msgid "Troubleshoot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270
+msgid ""
+"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by "
+"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273
+msgid ""
+"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</"
+"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in "
+"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:"
+"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check "
+"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is "
+"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo "
+"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the "
+"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool "
+"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works "
+"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date "
+"drivers or for more recent devices."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294
+msgid ""
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/"
+"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by "
+"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298
+msgid ""
+"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304
+msgid ""
+"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the "
+"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</"
+"link>.  The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</"
+"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-"
+"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management "
+"of the printer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311
+msgid ""
+"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner "
+"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't "
+"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate).  In this "
+"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the "
+"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device.  Afterwards, "
+"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory "
+"card which is appeared in the /media folder."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321
+msgid ""
+"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://"
+"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL "
+"protocol."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326
+msgid ""
+"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://"
+"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</"
+"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package "
+"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be "
+"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages "
+"according to your architecture."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a "
+"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338
+msgid ""
+"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9
+msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12
+msgid "transfugdrake"
+msgstr "transfugdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:17
+msgid "transfugdrake.png"
+msgstr "transfugdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center "
+"labeled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings "
+"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered"
+"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same "
+"computer as the Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake "
+"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some "
+"explanation about the tool and import options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of "
+"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to "
+"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and "
+"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account "
+"than yours own."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:51
+msgid "transfugdrake1.png"
+msgstr "transfugdrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of "
+"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</"
+"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed "
+"incorrectly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications "
+"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For "
+"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</"
+"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not "
+"use such accounts for the import purposes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import "
+"documents:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:80
+msgid "transfugdrake2.png"
+msgstr "transfugdrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</"
+"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</"
+"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to "
+"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"When you finished with the document import method choosing press "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method "
+"to import bookmarks:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:95
+msgid "transfugdrake3.png"
+msgstr "transfugdrake3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and "
+"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia "
+"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112
+msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:116
+msgid "transfugdrake4.png"
+msgstr "transfugdrake4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the "
+"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:128
+msgid "transfugdrake5.png"
+msgstr "transfugdrake5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:11
+msgid "Users and Groups"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:13
+msgid "userdrake"
+msgstr "userdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:18
+msgid "userdrake.png"
+msgstr "userdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="
+"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center "
+"labelled \"Manage users on system\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this "
+"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings "
+"(ID, shell, ...)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in "
+"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the "
+"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:35
+msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:37
+msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:41
+msgid "userdrake1.png"
+msgstr "userdrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the "
+"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything "
+"or nothing as well!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:49
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. "
+"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, "
+"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower "
+"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn "
+"orange and then green as the password strength improves."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure "
+"you entered what you intended to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that "
+"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options "
+"are Bash, Dash and Sh."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if "
+"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new "
+"user as the only member (this may be edited)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately "
+"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:73
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific "
+"group ID."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:78
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given "
+"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:87
+msgid "userdrake2.png"
+msgstr "userdrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.  "
+"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary "
+"accounts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long "
+"as the account is locked."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:98
+msgid "It is also possible to change the icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:100
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an "
+"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his "
+"password periodically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:106
+msgid "userdrake3.png"
+msgstr "userdrake3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:110
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups "
+"that the user is a member of."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be "
+"effective until his/her next login."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:118
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the "
+"group name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the "
+"users who are members of the group"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:126
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</"
+"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home "
+"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been "
+"created for the user, it will be deleted as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:133
+msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:136
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to "
+"refresh the display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:141
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is "
+"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total "
+"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to "
+"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories "
+"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, "
+"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest "
+"account</guimenu>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the graphical server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:5
+msgid "XFdrake"
+msgstr "XFdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:10
+msgid "XFdrake.png"
+msgstr "XFdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</"
+"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the "
+"capital letters."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the "
+"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id="
+"\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:24
+msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:26
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server "
+"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example "
+"one with a proprietary driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by "
+"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical "
+"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> "
+"Xorg</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most "
+"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while "
+"in your Desktop Environment."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - "
+"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing "
+"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to "
+"use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for example)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:53
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and "
+"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor "
+"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the "
+"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:62
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the "
+"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:69
+msgid "XFdrake1.png"
+msgstr "XFdrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>When you change the color depth, "
+"a multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview "
+"of what the selected color depth looks like."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another "
+"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card "
+"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to "
+"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or "
+"select an uncomfortable setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for "
+"another one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and "
+"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:92
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:94
+msgid ""
+"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking "
+"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the "
+"graphical environment doesn't work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a "
+"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use "
+"XFdrake's text version."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want "
+"to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is "
+"right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:107
+msgid "Options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:110
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-"
+"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X "
+"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable "
+"three specific features depending on the graphic card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, "
+"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</"
+"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be "
+"unchecked for a server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask "
+"you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the "
+"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect "
+"and reconnect to activate the new configuration."
+msgstr ""
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC-cover.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1438102f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC-cover.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" 
+      xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" 
+      xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" 
+      xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" 
+      xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" 
+      xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" 
+      xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" 
+      version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" xml:id="MCC">
+
+  <info>
+    <title>Mageia Control Center</title>
+    <cover>
+      <para role="tagline">The tools to configure the Mageia system</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+	    <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+	    </para>
+            <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+  <article>
+  
+<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</article>
+</book>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..686be70f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" xml:id="MCC">
+
+  <info>
+    <title>Mageia Control Center</title>
+    <cover>
+	    <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+	    </para>
+            <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MageiaUpdate.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..98794ef6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MageiaUpdate.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="MageiaUpdate">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">Software Packages Update</title>
+
+    <subtitle>MageiaUpdate o drakrpm-update</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software
+management.</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with
+drakrpm-editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you
+are prompted to do so.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists
+those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by
+default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the
+<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process.</para>
+
+  <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of
+the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title
+means you can click to drop down a text.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by
+displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </inlinemediaobject>
+. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike.</para>
+    </note></para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/XFdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/XFdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a08240ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/XFdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">Set up the graphical server</title>
+
+    <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis
+role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the
+graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis>
+as root. Mind the capital letters.</para>
+    </footnote></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server
+configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example
+one with a proprietary driver.</para>
+
+  <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by
+manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical
+order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel>
+Xorg</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most
+graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while
+in your Desktop Environment.</para>
+
+      <para>If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> -
+<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing
+Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para>
+    </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to
+use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for
+example).</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and
+you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor
+isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the
+<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the
+colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para>
+
+  <para><mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>When you change the color depth, a
+multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview
+of what the selected color depth looks like.</para>
+
+  <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another
+one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card
+and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to
+set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or
+select an uncomfortable setting.</para>
+
+  <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for
+another one.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and
+restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking
+on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the
+graphical environment doesn't work.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a
+text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use
+XFdrake's text version.</para>
+    </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want
+to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is
+right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <title>Options:</title>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable
+Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to
+restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable
+three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time,
+<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon
+booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it
+may be unchecked for a server.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask
+you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the
+previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect
+and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--dav.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8000d4d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--dav.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--dav"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">Access WebDAV shared drives and directories</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root.</para>
+  </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure
+WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+ <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a
+protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it
+appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a
+WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV
+server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Creating a new entry</title>
+
+    <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if
+any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new
+entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para>
+
+    <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.  Continue
+with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the
+<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct
+it, if needed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount
+point.</para>
+
+    <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other
+options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the
+access.</para>
+
+    <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button
+<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your
+new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you
+are asked whether or not to save the modifications in
+<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the
+remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for
+one-time usage, do not save it.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..09581505
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--2079.07.07 apb: Corrected syntax for userdrake link. -->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">Share your hard disk partitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This simple tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you, the
+administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home
+subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have
+computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled
+"Share your hard disk partitions".</para>
+
+  <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to
+share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No
+sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on
+<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on
+<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for
+the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their
+directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically
+created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para>
+
+  <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you
+choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>.
+Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on
+the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both
+Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any
+required packages will be installed if necessary.</para>
+
+  <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen.  In
+this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows
+you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare
+group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group,
+then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the
+fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information
+about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend="userdrake"/></para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and
+reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her
+file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers
+have this facility.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--nfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0d7fd7cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--nfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">Access NFS shared drives and directories</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare some
+shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The
+protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix
+systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at
+boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session
+for a user with tools such as file browsers.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Procedure</title>
+
+    <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers
+which share directories.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the
+shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png">
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have
+to specify where to mount the directory.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png">
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and
+change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After
+mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button,
+a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab
+modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the
+network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file
+browser, for example in Dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--removable.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5581c3b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--removable.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--removable">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD/DVD burner</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool <footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote>is found under the tab Local
+disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable
+hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). </para>
+
+  <para>Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. </para>
+
+  <para>At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and
+the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change
+them. Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+button. </para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Mount point</title>
+
+    <para>Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Opciones</title>
+
+    <para>Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the
+<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:</para>
+
+    <para/>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>user/nouser</title>
+
+      <para>user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this
+option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is
+the only one who can umount it. </para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--smb.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..29c519e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--smb.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--smb"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle>
+
+  </info>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare which
+shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The
+protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R)
+systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared
+directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with
+tools such as file browsers.</para>
+
+    <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of
+available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Procedure</title>
+
+    <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who
+share directories.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the server name and on &gt; before the server name to display the
+list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para>
+
+    <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you
+have to specify where to mount the directory.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount
+button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the
+<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+    <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to
+connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it
+with the same button.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask
+"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow
+directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The
+new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in
+dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drak3d.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drak3d.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..afc70028
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drak3d.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">3D Desktop Effects</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> lets you manage the 3D
+desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by
+default.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section annotations="center">
+    <title>Getting Started</title>
+
+    <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the
+package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can
+start.</para>
+
+    <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.  Here you
+can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a
+composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special
+effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn
+it on.</para>
+
+    <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of
+Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be
+installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the
+<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz
+Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in
+for the changes to take effect.</para>
+
+    <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz
+Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager)  tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Troubleshooting</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title>
+
+      <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop
+but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in
+screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be
+prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login
+with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the
+log in problem.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakauth.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakauth.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7288f61f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakauth.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">Autenticación</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="drakauth.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="drakauth-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the
+manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para>
+
+  <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your
+computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so
+and give information about that.</para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakautologin.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakautologin.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84bc2c30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakautologin.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakautologin">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakautologin-ti1">Set up autologin to automatically log in</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakautologin</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakautologin-im1" fileref="drakautologin.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakautologin</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to automatically
+login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any
+password. It's called autologin.  This is generally a good idea when there
+is only one user like to be using the machine.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the
+Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para>
+
+  <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para>
+
+  <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system
+starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the
+boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be
+possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by
+launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'.</para>
+
+  <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either
+<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to
+continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check
+<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if
+needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default
+username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakboot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a2ef1c32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakboot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakboot" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">Set up boot system</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" align="center" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is
+slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition
+(ESP).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakboot--boot2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to configure the
+boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot,
+etc.)</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled "Set up
+boot system".</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.  Changing
+some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if
+using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub,
+Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu.  It is just a question
+of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the
+<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you
+are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any
+modification can prevent your machine from booting.</para>
+
+  <para>In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is
+installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common
+to all operating systems installed.</para>
+
+  <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set
+the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in
+seconds. During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available
+operating systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is
+made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para>
+
+  <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is
+possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and
+password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change
+settings. The username is "root" and the password is the one chosen here.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the
+power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was
+the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI
+compatible.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for
+multicore processors.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual
+processor and enable SMP.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local
+APIC:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two
+components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O
+APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses
+to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful
+for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC
+system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message
+"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local
+APIC.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot
+loader you chose.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:</para>
+
+      <para>In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot
+time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu
+entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item.  If you
+click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton>
+buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or
+to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be
+able to use these tools.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want
+to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For
+example: Mageia3.</para>
+
+      <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches
+the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para>
+
+      <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the
+kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para>
+
+      <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to
+the kernel at boot time.</para>
+
+      <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this
+entry by default.</para>
+
+      <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to
+choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel>
+file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref
+linkend="draknetprofile"/>, in the drop-down lists.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in
+Legacy mode and UEFI mode):</para>
+
+      <para>In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel>
+displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default
+one.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakboot3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to
+the kernel at boot time.</para>
+
+      <para>If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them
+to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box
+<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel></para>
+
+      <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to
+choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable
+Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not
+touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakboot6.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable
+unless chain loaded from another OS.</para>
+      </warning>
+
+      <para>To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub
+Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below).</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakboot4.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..428ce792
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section
+xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakbug" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakbug-ti1">Mageia Bug Report Tool</title><subtitle>drakbug</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="drakbug-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"
+ fileref="drakbug.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Usually, this tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakbug</emphasis>.</para></footnote> starts automatically
+when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing
+a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the
+information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report.</para>
+
+  <para>If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that,
+then please read <link
+xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly">How to
+report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the "Report" button.</para>
+
+  <para>In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message
+that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to
+that existing report that you saw the bug, too.</para>
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug_report.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..91d5bb2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug_report.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section
+xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xml:id="drakbug_report" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="drakbug_report-ti1">Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports</title><subtitle>drakbug_report</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can only be started and used
+on the command line.</para>
+
+<para>It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by
+doing <emphasis role="bold">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>,
+but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be
+several GBs large.</para>
+<note><para>The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing
+the unneeded parts.</para></note>
+  <para>This command collects the following information on your system:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para> lspci</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> pci_devices</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> dmidecode</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> fdisk</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> scsi</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> /sys/bus/scsi/devices</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> lsmod</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> cmdline</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> pcmcia: stab</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> usb</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> partitions</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> cpuinfo</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> syslog</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> Xorg.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> monitor_full_edid</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> stage1.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> ddebug.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> install.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> fstab</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> modprobe.conf</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> lilo.conf</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> grub: menu.lst</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> grub: install.sh</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> grub: device.map</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> xorg.conf</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> urpmi.cfg</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> modprobe.preload</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> sysconfig/i18n</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> /proc/iomem</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> /proc/ioport</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> mageia version</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> rpm -qa</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> df</para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+
+  <note><para>At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's
+output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch
+to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as
+root) <emphasis role="bold"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If
+you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000
+lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role="bold">journalctl -a | tail
+-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>.</para></note>
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakclock.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakclock.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..86a9f7c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakclock.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakclock">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">Manage date and time</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the tab System
+in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and
+time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a
+right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para>It's a very simple tool.</para>
+
+  <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On
+the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on
+the upper right), the 2nd (in blue)  and it is a Sunday. Select the month
+(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or
+2012). Select the day by clicking on its number.</para>
+
+  <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time
+Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on
+time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time
+Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para>
+
+  <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's
+useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours,
+minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows
+to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see
+your desktop environment settings for that.</para>
+
+  <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the
+<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the
+nearest town.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they
+will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation
+settings.</para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect--del.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7b3e85c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect--del.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">Remove a connection</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> 
+    <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then
+click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> 
+    <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted
+successfully.</para> 
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..feccea4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,808 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakconnect">
+  <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled &amp; Faudel whilst editing this document.">
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure much of
+local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from
+your access provider or your network administrator.</para>
+
+    <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware
+and provider you have.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one
+to configure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP
+address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers
+are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained
+below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,
+the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.
+The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option
+<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers
+have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address
+from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server
+requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP
+address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection
+configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Manual configuration</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS
+servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no
+HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is
+attributed by default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are
+available from your service provider's website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your
+computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is
+"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless
+you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again,
+domestic ADSL would not need this setting.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Cable modem connection</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one
+to configure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP
+address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>None</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name
+and password.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers
+are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained
+below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,
+the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.
+The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option
+<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers
+have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address
+from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server
+requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP
+address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection
+configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Manual configuration</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers
+to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME
+is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is
+attributed by default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are
+available from your service provider's website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your
+computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is
+"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless
+you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again,
+domestic connection would not need this setting.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new DSL connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to
+configure it.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manual TCP/IP configuration</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Access settings</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account Login (user name)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new ISDN connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>External ISDN modem</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and
+manufacturer. Select your card.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries.  Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave
+you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Connection name</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Phone number</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Login ID</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Authentication method</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or
+manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by
+automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to
+put:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Domain name</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>First and second DNS Server</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you
+are sure that your provider is configured to accept it.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic
+or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the
+IP address.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for
+Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure.  Use ndiswrapper
+only if the other configuration methods did not work.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that
+the card has detected.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Operating mode:</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Managed</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>To access to an existing access point (the most frequent).</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Ad-Hoc</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>To configure direct connection between computers.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured.</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WPA/WPA2</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WEP</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption method.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Encryption key</para>
+
+            <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a
+manual IP address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are
+declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained
+below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here.  If no HOSTNAME is
+specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The
+Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option
+<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server
+requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP
+address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all
+connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Manual configuration</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,
+the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are
+available from your providers website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name,
+before the period.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to
+configure it.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Provide access settings</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Access Point Name</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account Login (user name)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Manual choice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package
+<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider
+gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP/CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Script-based</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Terminal-based</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakconnect-end">
+    <title>Ending the configuration</title>
+
+    <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow
+access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch
+automatically between access point according to the signal strength.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Metric (10 by default)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>MTU</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Network Hotplugging</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start
+immediately or not.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconsole.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconsole.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..65b8f97c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconsole.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakconsole">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">Open a console as administrator</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> gives you access to a console
+which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more
+information about that.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakdisk.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakdisk.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..96a2e342
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakdisk.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakdisk">
+ 
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">Manage disk partitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakdisk or diskdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny
+error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a
+partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll
+see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on
+<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you
+want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your
+preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions,
+resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a
+partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear
+all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete
+disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a
+partition.</para>
+
+ 
+
+  <!-- 2015-07-06 Note added by Lebarhon -->
+<note>
+    <para>If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called "EFI System
+Partition" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it contains
+all your different operating systems bootloaders.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot
+choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition
+must be unmounted first.</para>
+
+  <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para>
+
+  <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to
+delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button
+<guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is
+selected</para>
+
+  <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis>
+gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be
+seen in the screenshot below.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakedm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakedm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3edfe0ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakedm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakedm">
+  <info>
+    
+    <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC .  2017-04-10 simonnzg has looked and seems OK-->
+<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">Set up display manager</title>
+    <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png" align="center" xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  <para xml:id="drakedm-pa1" revision="1">Here<footnote><para xml:id="drakedm-pa3" revision="1">You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> you can choose which display
+manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available
+on your system will be shown.</para>
+  <para xml:id="drakedm-pa2" revision="1">Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look
+different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM
+is a lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfirewall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d478493a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfirewall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">Set up your personal firewall</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Security
+tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal
+firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system
+security, permissions and audit".</para>
+
+  <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming
+connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the
+first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection
+attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box -
+<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable
+the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para>
+
+  <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field
+<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these
+examples :</para>
+
+  <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is
+checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...)
+it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even
+recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature
+allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box
+<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second
+box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure
+somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards
+corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot
+below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be
+warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para>
+
+  <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the
+Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary
+packages are downloaded.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network &amp;
+Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfont.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfont.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74c3f3f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfont.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakfont">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It
+allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen
+above shows:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>a preview of the selected font.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>some buttons explained here later.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You
+must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)  able
+to use the fonts.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Uninstall:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.  Be
+careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the
+documents that use them.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Import:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The
+supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the
+<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis
+role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the
+fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when
+done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para>
+
+  <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont
+main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakguard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakguard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1a205953
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakguard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakguard">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">Parental Controls</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental
+Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the
+drakguard package (not installed by default).</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Presentation</title>
+
+    <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to
+restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three
+useful capabilities:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by
+controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can
+only execute what you accept them to execute.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through
+blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the
+website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental
+control blocker DansGuardian.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Configuring Parental controls</title>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2,
+Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on
+your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel
+feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named
+users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by
+an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this
+prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will
+then suggest you reboot.</para>
+      </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental
+control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab
+is opened.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the
+websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all
+the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have
+their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the
+right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are
+not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.  Select an
+user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to
+remove him/her from the allowed users.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed
+with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and
+<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time
+window.</para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title>
+
+      <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Block Programs Tab</title>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to
+restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the
+applications you wish to block.</para>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand
+side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakgw.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakgw.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..789a2b5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakgw.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">Share the Internet connection with other local machines</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+                 xml:id="drakgw-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-principles">
+    <title>Principles</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="../drakgw-net.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a
+computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local
+network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to
+other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the
+gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card
+must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to
+the Internet (2).</para>
+
+    <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are
+set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard">
+    <title>Gateway wizard</title>
+
+    <para>The wizard<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> offers successive steps
+which are shown below:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this
+and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard
+automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that
+what is proposed is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes
+one, check that this is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask
+and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual
+configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.  Otherwise, you have to
+specify the address of a DNS server.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure
+it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it,
+with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the
+proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to
+printers and to share them.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+    <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-configure">
+    <title>Configure the client</title>
+
+    <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to
+specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address
+automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting
+to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is
+using.</para>
+
+    <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular
+specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the
+gateway.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-stop">
+    <title>Stop connection sharing</title>
+
+    <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch
+the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the
+sharing.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakhosts.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakhosts.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..220fa9f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakhosts.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">Hosts definitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed
+IP-addresses, this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows to
+specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name
+instead of the IP-address.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window
+to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an
+alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the
+same window.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakinvictus.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d44a273
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakinvictus.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetcenter.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..baf88644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetcenter.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="draknetcenter">
+  
+  
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 
+Write some text means i can't do it :(
+What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything.
+-->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">Network Center</title>
+    <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is found under the Network
+&amp; Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para>
+  <para/>
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks
+configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite,
+etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending
+on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its
+settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a
+network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN,
+ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para>
+    <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the
+first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless
+networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types,
+the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not
+connected.</para>
+    <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected
+networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal
+strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and
+the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then
+either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton>
+or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network
+to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings
+window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption
+key in particular).</para>
+    <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+  <section>
+    <title>The Monitor button</title>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the
+PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is
+available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray
+-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para>
+    <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the
+local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which
+gives details about connection status.</para>
+    <note>
+      <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic
+accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+  <section>
+    <title>The Configure button</title>
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network
+creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton>
+<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual
+configuration may give better results.</para>
+    <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks
+like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the
+<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are
+available from your providers website.</para>
+    <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count
+the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in
+the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may
+have to reconnect to the network.</para>
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network
+Manager:</emphasis></para>
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para>
+    <para>Only the items not already seen above are explained.</para>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para>
+    <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access
+point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected.  Select
+<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select
+<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the
+access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para>
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para>
+    <para>If it is a private network, you need to know these settings.</para>
+    <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a
+passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA
+personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used
+in private networks.</para>
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para>
+    <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access
+point while remaining connected to the network.</para>
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+  <section>
+    <title>The Advanced Settings button</title>
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetprofile.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..34f189ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetprofile.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook'
+  xmlns:ns5='http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML'
+  xmlns:ns4='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'
+  xmlns:ns3='http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml'
+  xmlns:ns2='http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink'
+  xmlns:ns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook'
+  xml:id='draknetprofile' version='5.0'>
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id='draknetprofile-ti1'>Manage different network profiles</title>
+    <subtitle>Draknetprofile</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix
+set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a
+desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between
+various network environments: having the system run in different network
+environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given
+network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each
+time the network environment changes.</para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Profiles</title>
+
+      <para>Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a
+standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>"network
+profile"</emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices,
+defined for a specific network environment. Each network profile has a
+<emphasis role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes
+out of system generation has the name <emphasis>"default"</emphasis>; when a
+new profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all
+already existing profile names.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Draknetprofile</title>
+
+      <para>Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center
+(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing
+profiles. This GUI allows to
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the
+"current profile",</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>create a new, additional profile,</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>delete a profile from the list of defined profiles.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Running Draknetprofile</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Defining profiles, profile switching</title>
+
+      <para>Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its
+users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally,
+launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im1'
+            fileref='./draknetprofile_mcc.png' format='PNG' align='center'
+            revision='1'/>
+        </imageobject>
+        <caption>
+          <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network &amp;
+Internet tab</emphasis></para>
+        </caption>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <orderedlist>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop,</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>select the "Network &amp; Internet" tab,</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>hit "Manage different network profiles" in the "Personalize and Secure your
+network" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1).</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+      <para>Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a
+terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when
+standard-output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted -
+for instance for debugging). Simply type:</para>
+
+      <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'>
+        <tgroup cols='1'>
+          <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?>
+          <tbody>
+            <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?>
+              <entry><literal>&#x2002;draknetprofile&#x2002;</literal></entry>
+            </row>
+          </tbody>
+        </tgroup>
+      </informaltable>
+
+      <para>After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im2'
+            fileref='./draknetprofile_main.png' format='PNG'
+            align='center' revision='1'/>
+        </imageobject>
+        <caption>
+          <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of
+Draknetprofile</emphasis></para>
+        </caption>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently
+defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>"Activate" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as
+the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>"New" ... create a new profile;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>"Delete" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>"Quit" ... exit from Draknetprofile.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>Before hitting the "Activate" or the "Delete" button, you have to select a
+profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the
+target profile.</para>
+
+      <para>Hitting the "New" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can type
+the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different from
+any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise copy
+of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the current
+profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties (modify the
+automatically created configuration) in a second, independent action:</para>
+
+      <itemizedlist>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>exit from Draknetprofile (hit the "Quit" button),</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>back in the "Network &amp; Internet" tab, you select the tab "Set up a new
+network interface (...)" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1),</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are
+similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during
+system generation - as documented in the <link
+linkend='drakconnect-ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+
+      <para>The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the "Advanced" button
+to make it visible. It should display the list of names of Draknetprofile
+<emphasis role='bold'>"modules"</emphasis> (such as "network", "firewall",
+"urpmi"), each with a check-button next to the name; these check-buttons
+determine whether the properties controlled by that module are included into
+the profile or not.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Using a system that has more than one profile</title>
+
+      <para>In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user
+interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the
+bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you
+will get a message like</para>
+
+      <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'>
+        <tgroup cols='1'>
+          <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?>
+          <tbody>
+            <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?>
+              <entry><literal>&#x2002;Select network profile: (1) default (2)
+roaming*&#x2002;</literal></entry>
+            </row>
+          </tbody>
+        </tgroup>
+      </informaltable>
+
+      <para>Type 1 or 2 to select the "default", respectively the "roaming" profile, or
+carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk (the
+profile that was active when the system had been shut down).</para>
+
+      <para>Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens
+that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a
+profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot.  This
+problem is under investigation.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile</title>
+
+    <para>The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory
+<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names
+like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file
+<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> .
+    </para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e1f890f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">Share drives and directories using NFS</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1"  xml:id="draknfs-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Prerequisites</title>
+
+    <para>When the wizard<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> is launched for the
+first time, it may display the following message:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Main window</title>
+
+    <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list
+is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a
+configuration tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Modify entry</title>
+
+    <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched
+with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are
+available.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Directory</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The
+<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose
+it.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Host access</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared
+directory.</para>
+
+      <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name
+recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard
+characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the
+domain cs.foo.edu.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all
+hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either
+`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>User ID Mapping</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid
+0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client
+cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on
+the server itself.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root
+squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients
+(no_root_squash).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids
+to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP
+directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID
+mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of
+the anonymous account.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Advanced options</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests
+originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).  This option
+is on by default.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read
+and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any
+request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by
+using this option.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from
+violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made
+by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can
+help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See
+exports(5) man page for more details.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>So far the list has at least one entry.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration
+files.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakproxy.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakproxy.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1b1cdfa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakproxy.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakproxy"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">Proxy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="drakproxy.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use
+this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> to configure it. Your net
+administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify
+some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para>
+
+  <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a
+proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts as
+an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other
+servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service,
+such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a
+different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to
+simplify and control their complexity.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6a3bc614
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Configure Media</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections -->
+<!--2013-10-22 marja - improved wording, thanks to Aragorn :-) 
+                       - adjusted "Add" part to changed behaviour of this tool
+		       (no longer a choice to only add "update sources" is
+		       given) -->
+<imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><important>
+      <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as
+repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources
+to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button
+below).</para>
+    </important> <note>
+      <para>If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a
+USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media
+used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new
+packages, you should disable (or delete) this media.  (It will have the
+media type CD-Rom).</para>
+    </note> <note>
+      <para>Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called
+i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether
+your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They
+don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both
+the i586 and the x86_64 media.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis
+role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote></para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with
+some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only
+media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons,
+this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root
+and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis></para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release
+versions contain at least:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available
+supported by Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which
+are not free</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might
+be patent claims in some countries.</para>
+
+        <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this
+version of Mageia was released.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release
+due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled,
+even with a very slow internet connection.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions
+backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests
+of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the
+corrections.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the right</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to
+remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example)  since
+all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and
+proxy).</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories
+contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button
+adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that
+you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a
+specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from
+the drop-down "File" menu.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list
+in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same
+release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will
+be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and
+click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's
+too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the
+actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them
+out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose
+between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the
+<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by
+clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very
+close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available
+mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that
+isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart
+name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to
+the medium type)</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always
+or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the
+download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-,
+update only, always or never).</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate
+the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the
+window that appear, select a medium and then click on
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click
+on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para>
+      </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it
+here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if
+necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+
+    <para>For more information about configuring the media, see <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management">the Mageia Wiki
+page</link>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksambashare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksambashare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..52ec55be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksambashare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksambashare" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="draksambashare.png" format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im1" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some
+resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure
+the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is
+also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the
+resources of the Samba server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Preparation</title>
+
+    <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP
+address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with
+<xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the
+station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The
+firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title>
+
+    <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis
+role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> checks if
+needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not
+yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare0.png" xml:id="draksambashare0-im1" align="center" revision="1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already
+selected.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare1.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the
+access to the shared resources.</para>
+
+    <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on
+the network.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare2.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Choose the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the
+resource</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for
+each share</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP
+address or host name.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be
+described in the Windows workstations.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im4" align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png" revision="1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im5" align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png" revision="1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the
+configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in
+<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare6.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im6" align="center" revision="1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller"
+option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or
+not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same
+as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and
+group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.  The centralized
+account repository is shared between (security)  controllers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Declare a directory to share</title>
+
+    <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im7" fileref="draksambashare15.png" revision="1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the
+<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether
+the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable.  The share
+name can not be modified.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare16.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im8" align="center" revision="1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Configure</title>
+
+      <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration
+files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Printers share</title>
+
+    <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Samba users</title>
+
+    <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared
+resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref
+linkend="userdrake"/><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksec.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksec.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a474a732
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksec.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="draksec">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Configure authentication for Mageia tools</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksec</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec0.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote>is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks
+usually done by the administrator.</para>
+
+  <para>Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:
+  </para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="draksec.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in
+the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a
+drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the
+same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksnapshot-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..40b3d4a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksnapshot-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+	xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+	xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+	xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+	xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+	xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+	xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+       	xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">Snapshots</title>
+	  <subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+	    <imagedata   xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+		    format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is available in MCC's
+<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration
+tools</guilabel> section.</para>
+  <para>When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message
+about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to
+proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed.</para>
+
+ <para>Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the
+<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable
+Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system,
+<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>.</para>
+  <para>If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose
+<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to
+the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and
+files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the
+<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from
+the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> be
+included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are
+done.</para>
+	  <para>Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the
+<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted
+USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis
+role="bold">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>.
+  </para>
+  <para>Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksound.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksound.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff4c5608
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksound.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">Sound Configuration</title>
+    <subtitle>draksound</subtitle>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para>
+  <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and
+troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you
+change the sound card.</para>
+  <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound
+inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting
+sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio
+volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para>
+  <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it
+enabled.</para>
+  <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It
+is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para>
+  <para>The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with
+fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this
+before asking the community for help.</para>
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an
+obvious button.</para>
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="draksound1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6030f5a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">Set up a UPS for power monitoring</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakvpn.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakvpn.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..09f22bc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakvpn.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakvpn">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure secure
+access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local
+workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the
+configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is
+already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the
+network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Configuración</title>
+
+    <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which
+protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para>
+
+    <para>Then give your connection a name.</para>
+
+    <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For Cisco VPN</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the
+first time the tool is used.</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>Select the files that you received
+from the network administrator.</para>
+
+        <para>Advanced parameters:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN
+connection.</para>
+
+    <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network
+connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect
+to this VPN.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_apache2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..200e4ed3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_apache2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up a web
+server.
+  </para>
+  <section>
+    <title>What is a web server?</title>
+    <para>
+      Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be
+accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)
+    </para>
+  </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2</title>
+      <para>
+	Welcome to the web server wizard.
+      </para>
+      <procedure>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Introduction</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step1.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step2.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad
+things.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server User Module</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step3.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Allows users to create their own sites.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>User web directory name</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step4.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will
+display it.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server Document Root</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step5.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Summary</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step6.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Finish</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step7.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+      </procedure>
+    </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_bind.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5def6a07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_bind.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">Configure DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5569f30e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">Configure DHCP</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net
+interfaces</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> can help you to set up a
+<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should
+be installed before you can access to it.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is DHCP?</title>
+
+    <para>The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a
+standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically
+configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet
+communication. (From Wikipedia)</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp</title>
+
+    <para>Welcome to the DHCP server wizard.</para>
+
+    <procedure>
+      <step>
+        <title>Introduction</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Selecting Adaptor</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for
+which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Select IP range</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im4"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want
+the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to
+some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then
+click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Summary</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im5" format="PNG"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Hold on...</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im6"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and
+change things around.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Hours later...</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im7"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </step>
+    </procedure>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is done</title>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from
+<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and
+adding the new parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>hname</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>dns</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>net</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>ip</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>mask</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>rng1</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>rng2</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>dname</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>gateway</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>tftpserverip</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>dhcpd_interface</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Also modifying Webmin configuration file
+<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_ntp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..463d8c94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_ntp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">Configure time</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <!-- 2013-10-25 Lebarhon - 3 screenshots ready to be added when it is possible -->
+<imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> purpose is to set the time of
+your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by
+default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base
+packages.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp</title>
+
+    <procedure>
+      <step>
+        <para>After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three
+time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice
+because this server always points to available time servers.</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp2.png">
+              <info>
+<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/></info>
+            </imagedata>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <para>The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you
+arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it
+using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button.  If everything is right,
+click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It
+may take a while and you finally get this screen below:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp3.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <para>Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool</para>
+      </step>
+    </procedure>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is done</title>
+
+    <para>This tool executes the following steps:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to
+<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and
+<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to
+<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of
+servers;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server
+name;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and
+<code>ntpd</code> services;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9650206e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">Configure FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an
+<acronym>FTP</acronym> server.
+  </para>
+  <section>
+    <title>What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?</title>
+    <para>
+      File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network
+protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a
+<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)
+    </para>
+  </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd</title>
+      <para>
+	Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up.
+      </para>
+      <procedure>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Introduction</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad
+things.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server Information</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email
+complaints too and whether to allow root login access.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym>
+(File eXchange Protocol)
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Summary</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Finish</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+      </procedure>
+    </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_squid.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..19fc91c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_squid.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakwizard_squid"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">Configure proxy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> can help you to set up a
+proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed
+before you can access to it.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is a proxy server?</title>
+
+    <para>A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts
+as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other
+servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service,
+such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a
+different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to
+simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid</title>
+
+    <para>Welcome to the proxy server wizard.</para>
+
+    <procedure>
+      <step>
+        <title>Introduction</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step1.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im2"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Selecting the proxy port</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step2.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im3"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Set Memory and Disk Usage</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step3.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im4"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Select Network Access Control</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step4.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im5"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Set visibility to local network or world, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Grant Network Access</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step5.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im6"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Use Upper Level Proxy Server?</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step6.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im7"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Upper Level Proxy URL and Port</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step7.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im8"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Summary</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step8.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im9"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Start during boot?</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step9.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1"
+                       xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im10"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then
+click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Finish</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step10.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1"
+                       xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im11"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+    </procedure>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is done</title>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Installing the package squid if needed;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in
+<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from
+<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>cache_dir</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>localnet</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>cache_mem</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>http_port</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>cache_peer</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>visible_hostname</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Restarting <code>squid.</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_sshd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eb098951
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_sshd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">OpenSSH daemon configuration</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ 
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an
+<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon.
+  </para>
+  <section>
+    <title>What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?</title>
+    <para>
+      Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data
+communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and
+other secure network services between two networked computers that connects,
+via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client
+(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs,
+respectively). (From Wikipedia)
+    </para>
+  </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd</title>
+      <para>
+	Welcome to the Open SSH wizard.
+      </para>
+      <procedure>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Select Type of Configure Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or
+<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>General Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard
+<acronym>SSH</acronym> port.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Authentication Methods</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting,
+then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Logging</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Choose logging facility and level of output, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Login Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>User Login Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Compression and Forwarding</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Summary</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im9" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Finish</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im10" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+      </procedure>
+    </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakxservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakxservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9eb36d1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakxservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakxservices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">Manage system services by enabling or disabling them</title>
+    <subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" fileref="drakxservices.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/harddrake2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/harddrake2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..20b3d725
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/harddrake2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="harddrake2"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title>
+
+    <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> 
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="harddrake2.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> gives a general view of the
+hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to
+look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command
+<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in
+<code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The window</title>
+
+    <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para>
+
+    <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are
+grouped by categories. Click on the &gt; to expand the content of a
+category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para>
+
+    <para>The right column displays information about the selected device.  The
+<guimenu>Help -&gt; Fields description</guimenu> gives some information
+about the content of the fields.</para>
+
+    <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are
+available at the bottom of the right column:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to
+parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must
+used by experts only.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can
+configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The menu</title>
+
+    <para><bridgehead>Opciones</bridgehead></para>
+
+    <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to
+enable automatic detection:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>modem</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Jaz devices</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Zip parallel devices</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check
+the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will
+be operational the next time this tool is started.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/keyboarddrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a21b2248
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/keyboarddrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC -->
+<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> helps you
+configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on
+Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can
+be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled
+"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Keyboard Layout</title>
+
+    <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed
+in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each
+layout should be used for.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Keyboard Type</title>
+
+    <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are
+unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/localedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/localedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ca9a19c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/localedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="localedrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">Manage localization for your system</title>
+
+    <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="localedrake.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="localedrake-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root.
+  </para></footnote> can be found in the System
+section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for
+your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your
+language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate
+compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8).</para>
+
+  <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected
+language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to
+countries not listed.</para>
+
+  <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para>
+  
+<section xml:id="input_method">
+      <info>
+          <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Input method</title>
+      </info>
+  <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an
+input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input
+methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese,
+Korean, etc).</para>
+  <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so
+users should not need to configure it manually.</para>
+  <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions
+and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another
+part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para>
+</section>
+
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/logdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/logdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cde05a98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/logdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">View and search system logs</title>
+
+    <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system
+logs</guilabel>".</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To do a search in the logs</title>
+
+    <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to
+<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field
+<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)
+to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is
+possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the
+month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected
+day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button
+to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the
+file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by
+clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia
+configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.  These logs are
+updated each time a configuration is modified.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To configure a mail alert</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and
+the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured
+address.</para>
+
+    <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail
+Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton>
+Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the
+running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to
+look watch. (See screenshot above).</para>
+
+    <para>The following services can be watched :</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Webmin Service</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Postfix Mail Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>FTP Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Apache World Wide Web Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>SSH Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Samba Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Xinetd Service</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider
+unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows
+the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone
+out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value
+to 3 times the number of processors.</para>
+
+    <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the
+person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local
+or on the Internet).</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lsnetdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..64f369a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lsnetdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section
+xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xml:id="lsnetdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="lsnetdrake-ti1">Display Available NFS And SMB Shares</title>
+	  <subtitle>lsnetdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>This tool <footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">lsnetdrake</emphasis>.
+      </para>
+    </footnote> can only be started and used
+on the command line.</para>
+
+  <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Documentation
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lspcidrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8b67ca4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lspcidrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="lspcidrake">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="lspcidrake-ti1">Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information</title>
+
+    <subtitle>lspcidrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>This tool <footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">lspcidrake</emphasis>.</para>
+    </footnote> can only be started and used
+on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root.</para>
+
+  <para>lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB,
+PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst
+packages to work.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications.</para>
+
+  <para>lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it
+is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:</para>
+
+  <para>Information about the graphic card;</para>
+
+  <para><command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command></para>
+
+  <para>Information about the network</para>
+
+  <para><command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command></para>
+
+  <para>-i to ignore case distinctions.</para>
+
+  <para>In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for
+lspcidrake and the -i option for grep.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is
+called <emphasis role="bold">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..033f61d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">Boot</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-boot.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot
+steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure boot steps</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakautologin"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakautologin.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+    <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-hardware.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b2cf411d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-hardware.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-hardware">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">Hardware</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-hardware.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your
+hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Manage your hardware</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure
+hardware</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure graphics</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure mouse and keyboard</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure printing and scanning</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s),
+the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Others</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-intro.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1edb5ff0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-intro.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info>
+
+ 
+	<para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to
+choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was
+installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be
+selected in the big right panel.</para>
+
+	<para>The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related
+tools.</para>
+
+<para>The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in
+any of the MCC tabs.</para>
+
+	<para>The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool
+screens.</para>
+
+        <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on
+the "Search" tab in the left column.</para>
+  
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-localdisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..af07e78c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-localdisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">Local disks</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"   fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your
+local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist><title>Local disks</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem>
+  		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem>
+	          </orderedlist>
+
+ <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-network.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-network.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8ed5fe49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-network.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link
+below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Manage your network devices</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Personalize and Secure your network</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Others</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networkservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..63d5b448
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networkservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-networkservices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">Network Services</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-networkservices.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if
+the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose
+between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or
+on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Network Services</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para>
+  </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networksharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9a3f8d26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networksharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">Network Sharing</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"   fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and
+directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure Windows(R) shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and
+directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure NFS shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure WebDAV shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-security.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-security.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f1f5ccbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-security.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-security">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">Seguranza</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-security.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a
+link below to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Seguranza</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions
+and audit</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include>
+  <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> 
+  <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-sharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b7d154d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-sharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-sharing">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">Sharing</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-sharing.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only
+visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can
+choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link
+below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Sharing</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-system.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-system.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b083a6fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-system.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xml:id="mcc-system" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">Sistema</title>
+  </info>
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="mcc-system-im1" fileref="mcc-system.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration
+tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Manage system services</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para> <xref linkend="drakauth"/> </para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakfont"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Localization</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakclock"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="localedrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Administration tools</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="logdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="userdrake"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  
+  <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"/>
+  
+  <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mgaapplet-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cbdf2101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mgaapplet-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">Configure updates frequency</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software
+management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click /
+Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for
+updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.  The
+check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is
+out.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mousedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mousedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1b48c5a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mousedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1"  revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by
+Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para>
+
+  <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse
+and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any
+PS/2 &amp; USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is
+immediately taken into account.</para>
+
+  </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/msecgui.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/msecgui.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4d06a382
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/msecgui.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="msecgui">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title>
+
+    <subtitle>msecgui</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <!-- written by Lebarhon 2014/01/03 To be checked-->
+<imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" fileref="msecgui.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Presentation</title>
+
+    <para>msecgui<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is a graphic user interface for
+msec that allows to configure your system security according to two
+approaches:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to
+make it more secure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	 <para>It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn
+you if something seems dangerous.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a
+set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or
+enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your
+own customised security levels.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Overview tab</title>
+
+    <para>See the screenshot above</para>
+
+    <para>The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a
+button on the right side to configure them:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>msec itself with some information:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>enabled or not</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>the configured Base security level</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report
+and another button to execute the checks just now.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Security settings tab</title>
+
+    <para>A click on the second tab or on the Security
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown
+below.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="msecgui2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Basic security tab</title>
+
+      <para role="underline">
+        <emphasis role="underline">Security levels:</emphasis>
+      </para>
+
+      <para>After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab
+allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then
+in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The
+following levels are available:</para>
+
+      <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you
+do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on
+your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or
+constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only
+if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system
+vulnerable to attack.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">standard</emphasis>. This is the default
+configuration when installed and is intended for casual users.  It
+constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which
+detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory
+permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec
+versions).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when
+you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable.  It further restricts
+system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to
+the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and
+5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided,
+such as the <emphasis role="bold">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis
+role="bold">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis
+role="bold">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure
+system security according to the most common use cases.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+          <para>The last two levels called <emphasis role="bold">audit_daily </emphasis> and
+<emphasis role="bold">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security levels
+but rather tools for periodic checks only.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+      <para>These levels are saved in
+<filename>/etc/security/msec/level.&lt;levelname></filename>. You can define
+your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called
+<filename>level.&lt;levelname></filename>, placed into the folder
+<filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for
+power users which require a customised or more secure system configuration.</para>
+
+      <caution>
+	<para>Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default
+level settings.</para>
+      </caution>
+
+      <para>
+        <emphasis role="underline">Security alerts:</emphasis>
+      </para>
+
+      <para>If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email
+to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent
+by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You
+can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail
+and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive
+the security alerts directly on your desktop.  Check the relevant box to
+enable it.</para>
+
+      <important>
+	<para>It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to
+immediately inform the security administrator of possible security
+problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs
+files available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename></para></important>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="underline">Security options:</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer
+security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change
+any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in
+<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains
+the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done
+to the options.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>System security tab</title>
+
+      <para>This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a
+description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side
+column.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see
+screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the
+actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be
+selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the
+choice.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui11.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <caution>
+      <para>Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration
+using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you
+have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before
+saving them.</para>
+      </caution>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui10.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Network security</title>
+
+      <para>This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui4.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Periodic checks tab</title>
+
+      <para>Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of
+security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous.</para>
+
+      <para>This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency
+if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is
+checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui5.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Exceptions tab</title>
+
+      <para>Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In
+these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab
+allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert
+messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot
+below shows four exceptions.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui6.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton>
+button</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui7.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called
+<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the
+<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is
+obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the
+<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel>
+tab or modify it with a double clicK.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+    <title>Permisos</title>
+    <para>This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and
+enforcement.</para>
+    <para>Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard,
+secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security
+level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them
+into specific files called <filename>perm.&lt;levelname> </filename> placed
+into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is
+intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is
+also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission
+you want. Current configuration is stored in
+<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the
+list of all the modifications done to the permissions.</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui8.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+    <para>Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You
+can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the
+owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a
+given rule:</para>
+   <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the
+defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message
+if not, but does not change anything.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the
+permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the
+permissions.</para></listitem>
+   </itemizedlist>
+   <important><para>For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly.</para></important><para>To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button
+and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in
+the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification.</para>
+     <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui9.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+    <para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do
+not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the
+menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed
+the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. </para>
+    <note><para>It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the
+configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>.
+    </para></note>
+    <caution><para>Changes in the <emphasis role="bold">Permission tab</emphasis> (or directly
+in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic
+check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role="bold">Periodic
+checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately into
+account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can
+use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be
+changed by msecperms.</para></caution>
+    <caution><para>Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file
+manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked
+in the <emphasis role="bold">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will write
+the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of
+the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>.</para></caution>
+   </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/otherMageiaTools.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ffd03517
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/otherMageiaTools.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="otherMageiaTools">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="otherMageiaTools-ti1">Other Mageia Tools</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia
+Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the
+next pages.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakbug"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>
+		</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakbug_report"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis></para>
+	</listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="lsnetdrake"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="lspcidrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+        	<para>And more tools?</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakbug.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakbug_report.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="lsnetdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="lspcidrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/rpmdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6ab33fa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/rpmdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast">
+  <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags-->
+<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove Software)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" align="center" fileref="rpmdrake.png" revision="1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a
+program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the
+graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online
+package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official
+servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages
+available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only
+certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by
+default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed
+packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries
+of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names
+included in the packages.</para>
+
+    <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref
+linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para>
+
+    <important>
+      <para>During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for
+the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake
+will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window
+: <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake8.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>If the above message annoys you
+and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit,
+it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories
+thanks to <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para>
+
+      <para>Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more
+packages, and allow to update your installed packages.</para>
+    </important>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The main parts of the screen</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first
+time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical
+interface. You can display either all the packages and all their
+dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only,
+updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who
+probably do not want command line or specialist tools.  Since you're reading
+this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge
+of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All".</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state filter:</emphasis>
+</firstterm></para>
+
+        <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the
+packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and
+not installed.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their
+summaries, through their complete description or through the files included
+in the packages.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword
+for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and
+"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box
+.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and
+sub categories.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete
+description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It
+can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the
+package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The status column</title>
+
+    <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by
+category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A
+list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium
+is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is
+installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or
+uncheck the box before the package name and click on
+<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><table>
+        <title/>
+
+        <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
+          <colspec align="center"/>
+
+          <thead>
+            <row>
+              <entry align="center">Icon</entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry>
+            </row>
+          </thead>
+
+          <tbody>
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake2.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake3.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake4.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake5.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake6.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry>
+            </row>
+          </tbody>
+        </tgroup>
+      </table></para>
+
+    <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status
+icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking
+on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange
+with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when
+clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The dependencies</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+    <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They
+are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an
+information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected
+dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It
+may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed
+library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a
+button to get more information and another button to choose which package to
+install.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/scannerdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5f7e27bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/scannerdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,259 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="scannerdrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">Set up scanner</title>
+    <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+
+
+  <section xml:id="scannerinstallation">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">Installation</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>This tool <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to configure a
+single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It
+also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a
+remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para>
+
+    <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following
+message:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install
+<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet
+installed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see
+the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance,
+<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner
+sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref
+linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para>
+
+    
+    <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its
+cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new
+scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a
+scanner manually</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the
+list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake2.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click
+<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE:
+Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link
+xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+    </note>
+
+<figure  xml:id="choosescannerport">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title>
+    </info> <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake3.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available
+ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that
+case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para>
+
+    <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen
+similar to the one below.</para>
+<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref
+linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake4.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="scannersharing">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake5.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be
+accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also
+decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on
+this machine.</para>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or
+deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on
+this computer.</para>
+
+    <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted
+from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake6.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake7.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote
+machines.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake8.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake9.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool
+offers to do it.</para>
+
+    <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive
+"net"</para>
+
+    <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para>
+  </section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerspecifics">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title>
+    </info>  
+
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Hewlett-Packard</para>
+
+        <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis>
+(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow
+you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device
+Manager</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Epson</para>
+
+        <para>Drivers are available from <link
+xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+page</link>. When indicated, you must install the
+<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then
+<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the
+<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict
+with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be
+ignored.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+</section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title>
+    </info>  
+
+    <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref
+linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra
+steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded
+each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device,
+after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the
+firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you
+downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para>
+    When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at
+each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the
+<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para>
+      </listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know
+what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link
+xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+      
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/software-management.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/software-management.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4d12c017
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/software-management.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en"
+xml:id="software-management">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">Software Management</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"  fileref="software-management.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software
+management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+  <orderedlist><title>Software Management</title>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your
+system</emphasis></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para>
+    </listitem>
+	    <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media
+sources for install and update</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+    <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/system-config-printer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..715031aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/system-config-printer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="system-config-printer">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--  Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 -->
+<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) 
+ Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13-->
+<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a printer</title>
+
+    <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="introduction">
+    <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link
+ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration
+interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia
+offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer
+which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu
+and openSUSE.</para>
+
+    <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the
+installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way.</para>
+
+    <para>Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel>
+section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure
+printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked
+for.</para>
+      </footnote>.</para>
+
+    <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>task-printing-server</para>
+
+      <para>task-printing-hp</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of
+dependencies are needed.</para>
+
+    <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to
+detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a
+printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a
+printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line.  The window
+will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="automatic">
+    <title>Automatically detected printer</title>
+
+    <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the
+name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click
+"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be
+automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known
+drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the
+next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="non_automatic">
+    <title>No automatically detected printer</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window
+to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following
+options.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Select printer from database</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>provide PPD file</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>search for a driver to download</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer
+first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one
+driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have
+encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one
+which know to work.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="terminate">
+    <title>Complete the installation process</title>
+
+    <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will
+allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is
+the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of
+available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After
+this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available
+printers.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printer">
+    <title>Network printer</title>
+
+    <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or
+wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to
+another workstation that serves as printserver.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed
+IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same
+as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed
+one.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or
+printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a
+configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label
+on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a
+Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it
+as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters
+after "HWaddr".</para>
+
+    <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to
+your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose,
+you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find
+Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu
+and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it
+says "host".</para>
+
+    <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a
+protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the
+list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list.</para>
+
+    <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find
+which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols">
+    <title>Network printing protocols</title>
+
+    <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as
+JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network
+via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is
+known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers
+which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the
+IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can
+manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like
+<emphasis>hp:/net/&lt;name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed
+IP-adress is not required.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the
+protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change
+the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be
+changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is
+the same as above.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The other protocols are:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can
+be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer
+connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by
+some ADSL-routers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp,
+but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol.  The port has to be
+defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but
+with TLS secured protocol.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be
+accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer
+connected to a station using LPD.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a
+station running Windows or a SMB server and shared.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form
+the URI:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Appsocket</para>
+
+        <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para>
+
+        <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para>
+
+        <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para>
+
+        <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Additional information can be found in the <link
+ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS
+documentation.</link></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="properties">
+    <title>Device Properties</title>
+
+    <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to
+parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your
+system, but you can specify a different one with the
+<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu,
+another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters
+of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> |
+<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title>
+
+    <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by
+inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para>
+
+    <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the
+<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="specificities">
+    <title>Specifics</title>
+
+    <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in
+Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link
+ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link> site to
+check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package
+is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then,
+redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report
+the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this
+tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer
+works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other
+up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><link
+ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This
+page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver
+for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para>
+
+    <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one
+devices</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the
+detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information
+<link
+ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>.  The
+tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the <guilabel>System</guilabel>
+menu. Also view <link
+ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link>
+for the management of the printer.</para>
+
+    <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner
+features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't
+allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate).  In this
+case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the
+picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device.  Afterwards,
+open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory
+card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link
+ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link> for
+the QPDL protocol.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link
+ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data"
+package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also
+be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages
+according to your architecture. </para>
+
+    <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a
+conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint
+<link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here </link>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/transfugdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..57fd4717
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/transfugdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 -->
+<!-- Tproof  -->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</title>
+
+    <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis
+role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled
+<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings
+from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark>
+installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake
+immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some
+explanation about the tool and import options.</para>
+
+  <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of
+<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para>
+
+  <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to
+choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and
+Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account
+than yours own.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of
+transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark>
+user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications
+(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For
+example, NVidia drivers in <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using
+<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the
+import purposes.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+to import documents:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My
+Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My
+Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the
+appropriate item in this window.</para>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+to import bookmarks:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia
+<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE
+   <para>
+With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para>
+
+   <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para>
+-->
+<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+
+  <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the
+<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/userdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/userdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..453926a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/userdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="userdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 -->
+<!-- Tproof  -->
+<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30  -->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">Users and Groups</title>
+
+    <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis
+role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled
+"Manage users on system"</para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this
+means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings
+(ID, shell, ...)</para>
+
+  <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in
+the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the
+<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the
+entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything
+or nothing as well!</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para>
+
+  <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly
+recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the
+password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should
+use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The
+shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure
+you entered what you intended to.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows
+you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are
+Bash, Dash and Sh.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if
+checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new
+user as the only member (this may be edited).</para>
+
+  <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately
+after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific
+group ID.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given
+for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.
+Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary
+accounts.</para>
+
+  <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long
+as the account is locked.</para>
+
+  <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an
+expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his
+password periodically.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that
+the user is a member of.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be
+effective until his/her next login.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group
+name.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users
+who are members of the group</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis
+role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to
+ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group
+has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to
+refresh the display.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended
+to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login
+is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications
+to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the
+end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click
+in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file